AMX | CSG-580 | Specifications | AMX CSG-580 Specifications

AMX CSG-580 Specifications
Operation/Reference Guide
MVP-9000i
9" Modero® ViewPoint®
Touch Panel with Intercom
Touch Panels
Last Revised: 3/26/2013
AMX Limited Warranty and Disclaimer
This Limited Warranty and Disclaimer extends only to products purchased directly from AMX or an AMX Authorized Partner which
include AMX Dealers, Distributors, VIP’s or other AMX authorized entity.
AMX warrants its products to be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use for three (3) years from the date of
purchase, with the following exceptions:
•
Electroluminescent and LCD Control Panels are warranted for three (3) years, except for the display and touch overlay components are warranted for a period of one (1) year.
•
Disk drive mechanisms, pan/tilt heads, power supplies, and MX Series products are warranted for a period of one (1) year.
•
AMX lighting products are guaranteed to switch on and off any load that is properly connected to our lighting products, as long
as the AMX lighting products are under warranty. AMX also guarantees the control of dimmable loads that are properly connected to our lighting products. The dimming performance or quality there of is not guaranteed, impart due to the random combinations of dimmers, lamps and ballasts or transformers.
•
AMX software is warranted for a period of ninety (90) days.
•
Batteries and incandescent lamps are not covered under the warranty.
•
AMX AutoPatch Epica, Modula, Modula Series4, Modula CatPro Series and 8Y-3000 product models will be free of defects in
materials and manufacture at the time of sale and will remain in good working order for a period of three (3) years following the
date of the original sales invoice from AMX. The three-year warranty period will be extended to the life of the product (Limited
Lifetime Warranty) if the warranty card is filled out by the dealer and/or end user and returned to AMX so that AMX receives it
within thirty (30) days of the installation of equipment but no later than six (6) months from original AMX sales invoice date. The
life of the product extends until five (5) years after AMX ceases manufacturing the product model. The Limited Lifetime Warranty
applies to products in their original installation only. If a product is moved to a different installation, the Limited Lifetime Warranty
will no longer apply, and the product warranty will instead be the three (3) year Limited Warranty.
All products returned to AMX require a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. The RMA number is obtained from the AMX
RMA Department. The RMA number must be clearly marked on the outside of each box. The RMA is valid for a 30-day period. After
the 30-day period the RMA will be cancelled. Any shipments received not consistent with the RMA, or after the RMA is cancelled, will
be refused. AMX is not responsible for products returned without a valid RMA number.
AMX is not liable for any damages caused by its products or for the failure of its products to perform. This includes any lost profits, lost
savings, incidental damages, or consequential damages. AMX is not liable for any claim made by a third party or by an AMX Authorized Partner for a third party.
This Limited Warranty does not apply to (a) any AMX product that has been modified, altered or repaired by an unauthorized agent or
improperly transported, stored, installed, used, or maintained; (b) damage caused by acts of nature, including flood, erosion, or earthquake; (c) damage caused by a sustained low or high voltage situation or by a low or high voltage disturbance, including brownouts,
sags, spikes, or power outages; or (d) damage caused by war, vandalism, theft, depletion, or obsolescence.
This limitation of liability applies whether damages are sought, or a claim is made, under this warranty or as a tort claim (including
negligence and strict product liability), a contract claim, or any other claim. This limitation of liability cannot be waived or amended by
any person. This limitation of liability will be effective even if AMX or an authorized representative of AMX has been advised of the
possibility of any such damages. This limitation of liability, however, will not apply to claims for personal injury.
Some states do not allow a limitation of how long an implied warranty last. Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of incidental or consequential damages for consumer products. In such states, the limitation or exclusion of the Limited Warranty may not
apply. This Limited Warranty gives the owner specific legal rights. The owner may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
The owner is advised to consult applicable state laws for full determination of rights.
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY, AMX MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AMX
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES NOT STATED IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT
MAY BE IMPOSED BY LAW ARE LIMITED TO THE TERMS OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE LIMITED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MODIFY OR DISCONTINUE DESIGNS, SPECIFICATIONS, WARRANTIES, PRICES, AND POLICIES WITHOUT NOTICE.
AMX Software License and Warranty Agreement
•
LICENSE GRANT. AMX grants to Licensee the non-exclusive right to use the AMX Software in the manner described in this
License. The AMX Software is licensed, not sold. This license does not grant Licensee the right to create derivative works of the
AMX Software. The AMX Software consists of generally available programming and development software, product documentation, sample applications, tools and utilities, and miscellaneous technical information. Please refer to the README.TXT file on
the compact disc or download for further information regarding the components of the AMX Software. The AMX Software is subject to restrictions on distribution described in this License Agreement. AMX Dealer, Distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized
entity shall not, and shall not permit any other person to, disclose, display, loan, publish, transfer (whether by sale, assignment,
exchange, gift, operation of law or otherwise), license, sublicense, copy, or otherwise disseminate the AMX Software. Licensee
may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the AMX Software.
•
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. You hereby acknowledge that you are an authorized AMX dealer, distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity in good standing and have the right to enter into and be bound by the terms of this Agreement.
•
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. The AMX Software is owned by AMX and is protected by United States copyright laws, patent
laws, international treaty provisions, and/or state of Texas trade secret laws. Licensee may make copies of the AMX Software
solely for backup or archival purposes. Licensee may not copy the written materials accompanying the AMX Software.
•
TERMINATION. AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT, IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION, TO TERMINATE THIS LICENSE FOR ANY REASON UPON WRITTEN NOTICE TO LICENSEE. In the event that AMX terminates this License, the Licensee shall return or
destroy all originals and copies of the AMX Software to AMX and certify in writing that all originals and copies have been
returned or destroyed.
•
PRE-RELEASE CODE. Portions of the AMX Software may, from time to time, as identified in the AMX Software, include PRERELEASE CODE and such code may not be at the level of performance, compatibility and functionality of the GA code. The
PRE-RELEASE CODE may not operate correctly and may be substantially modified prior to final release or certain features may
not be generally released. AMX is not obligated to make or support any PRE-RELEASE CODE. ALL PRE-RELEASE CODE IS
PROVIDED "AS IS" WITH NO WARRANTIES.
•
LIMITED WARRANTY. AMX warrants that the AMX Software (other than pre-release code) will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. AMX DISCLAIMS ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH REGARD TO THE AMX SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES LICENSEE SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. Any supplements or updates to the AMX SOFTWARE,
including without limitation, any (if any) service packs or hot fixes provided to Licensee after the expiration of the ninety (90) day
Limited Warranty period are not covered by any warranty or condition, express, implied or statutory.
•
LICENSEE REMEDIES. AMX's entire liability and Licensee's exclusive remedy shall be repair or replacement of the AMX Software that does not meet AMX's Limited Warranty and which is returned to AMX in accordance with AMX's current return policy.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the AMX Software has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement AMX Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer.
Outside the United States, these remedies may not available. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO
EVENT SHALL AMX BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER
PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS AMX SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AMX HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE.
•
U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The AMX Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or
disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph ©(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs ©(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software
Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
•
SOFTWARE AND OTHER MATERIALS FROM AMX.COM MAY BE SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL. The United States
Export Control laws prohibit the export of certain technical data and software to certain territories. No software from this Site may
be downloaded or exported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) Cuba, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Iran, Syria, or any other country to which the United States has embargoed goods; or (ii) anyone on the United States Treasury Department's list of Specially
Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders. AMX does not authorize the downloading or
exporting of any software or technical data from this site to any jurisdiction prohibited by the United States Export Laws.
This Agreement replaces and supersedes all previous AMX Software License Agreements and is governed by the laws of
the State of Texas, and all disputes will be resolved in the courts in Collin County, Texas, USA. For any questions concerning this Agreement, or to contact AMX for any reason, please write: AMX License and Warranty Department, 3000 Research
Drive, Richardson, TX 75082.
FCC and IC Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received; including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Modifications to this product, unless expressly approved by AMX, could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Cet appareil est conforme avec Industrie Canada RSS standard exempts de licence (s). Son utilisation est soumise à
Les deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne peut pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) cet appareil doit accepter
Toute interférence, y compris les interférences qui peuvent causer un mauvais fonctionnement du dispositif.
This device complies with Health Canada's Safety Code 6 / IC RSS-210. The installer of this device should ensure that
RF radiation is not emitted in excess of the Health Canada's requirement. Information can be obtained at:
http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/ewh-semt/pubs/radiation/radio_guidelignes_direct-eng.php
Cet appareil est conforme avec Santé Canada Code de sécurité 6 / IC RSS-210. Le programme d'installation de cet
appareil doit s'assurer que les rayonnements RF n'est pas émis au-delà de l'exigence de Santé Canada. Les informations peuvent être obtenues: http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/ewhsemt/ pubs/radiation/radio_guide-lignes_direct-eng.php
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement
This product has been evaluated and found to comply with the limits established by the FCC, Industry Canada and
other international standards for radio frequency exposure when used as described in this manual. The use of
accessories not described may not ensure compliance with these limits.
Indoor Use
This device is intended for indoor use only. WiFi operation in the 5150-5250 MHz range is only for indoor usage to
reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems.
Dans la gamme de fréquences 5150 - 5250MHz, cet appareil est exclusivement destiné à un usage en intérieur afin de
réduire les risques potentiels d'interférences avec les systèmes de communications satellites partageant les mêmes
canaux.
Table of Contents
Introduction ........................................................................................................1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 1
Common Application....................................................................................................... 1
Features .......................................................................................................................... 1
Memory .................................................................................................................... 4
Connector Locations ................................................................................................. 4
Basic Operation ........................................................................................................ 5
Powering on the MVP-9000i ..................................................................................... 5
Intercom Microphone ............................................................................................... 5
Stylus ........................................................................................................................ 5
Kick Stand................................................................................................................. 5
Audio/Video Capabilities .......................................................................................... 5
Power Management.................................................................................................. 5
Cleaning the Touch Overlay and Case ...................................................................... 6
Picture View.............................................................................................................. 7
Preview Mode and Normal Mode ................................................................................... 8
Picture View Send Command .......................................................................................... 8
Seamless Wireless to Wired Swap ............................................................................ 9
Accessories .......................................................................................................11
Table Docking Station............................................................................................. 11
Powering the MVP-TDS-9.............................................................................................. 12
Recharging.............................................................................................................. 13
Using the USB ports ...................................................................................................... 13
Undocking the Touch Panel........................................................................................... 13
Cleaning the MVP-TDS-9 ............................................................................................... 13
Wall Docking Station .............................................................................................. 14
Unlocking the Touch Panel ..................................................................................... 15
Recharging.............................................................................................................. 16
A Note About Wall and Rack Installation................................................................ 17
Installation Recommendations ...................................................................................... 17
Installing the MVP-WDS-9....................................................................................... 18
Installing the Wall Docking Station and Plastic Back Box .............................................. 18
Installing the Optional Metal Rough-In Box ............................................................ 20
Pre-Wall Installation of the CB-MVP-WDS9 ................................................................... 20
Other MVP-WDS-9 installations .................................................................................... 21
Undocking from the MVP-TDS-9 or MVP-WDS-9 .................................................... 22
Configuring Communication .............................................................................25
Overview ................................................................................................................ 25
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
1
IR Communication ................................................................................................... 26
Modero Setup and System Settings ....................................................................... 26
Accessing the Setup and Protected Setup Pages.......................................................... 26
Setting the Panel’s Device Number............................................................................... 27
Wireless Settings - Wireless Access Overview ........................................................ 27
DHCP............................................................................................................................. 27
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) .............................................................................. 27
Configuring Wireless Network Access .................................................................... 29
Step 1: Configure the Device’s WiFi Settings ......................................................... 29
Wireless communication using a DHCP Address ........................................................... 29
Wireless Communication Using a Static IP Address....................................................... 30
Using the Wireless Site Survey Tool .............................................................................. 30
Step 2: Configure the Card’s Wireless Security Settings ........................................ 32
Configuring the Device’s Wireless Card for Secured Access to a WPA-PSK-Secured AP 32
Step 3: Choose a Master Connection Mode ........................................................... 32
Ethernet Over USB ................................................................................................. 33
Touch Panel Setup......................................................................................................... 33
Configure a Virtual NetLinx Master using NetLinx Studio ............................................. 35
Ethernet ........................................................................................................................ 37
Master Connection to a Virtual Master via Ethernet ..................................................... 37
Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel ................................................ 39
Using the NetLinx Master To Control the G4 Panel................................................ 40
Setup Pages ......................................................................................................43
Overview ................................................................................................................ 43
Accessing the Setup pages ..................................................................................... 43
Landscape and Portrait Mode Setup Pages ............................................................ 43
Setup Page ............................................................................................................. 43
Navigation Buttons........................................................................................................ 44
Display Page ........................................................................................................... 45
Audio Page ............................................................................................................. 46
WAV files - Supported Sample Rates ............................................................................ 47
Power Management Page....................................................................................... 47
Battery Conditioning ..................................................................................................... 48
Automatic Battery Conditioning.................................................................................... 49
Testing the Battery........................................................................................................ 50
Date/Time Page ...................................................................................................... 52
Panel Information Page........................................................................................... 54
Panel Information Page - Info ........................................................................................ 54
Panel Information Page - Config.................................................................................... 55
Panel Information Page - File ........................................................................................ 56
2
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Panel Information Page - Project................................................................................... 57
Protected Setup Pages .....................................................................................59
System & Panel Options page ................................................................................ 60
Function Show Example ................................................................................................ 61
Security Settings ........................................................................................................... 62
Installing Firmware ........................................................................................................ 63
System Settings Page ............................................................................................. 64
System Settings - Master .............................................................................................. 64
System Settings - Wired ................................................................................................ 65
System Settings - WiFi .................................................................................................. 66
Security Modes ....................................................................................................... 68
Open ............................................................................................................................. 69
WEP .............................................................................................................................. 69
WPA-PSK....................................................................................................................... 71
EAP Security & Server Certificates - Overview ....................................................... 72
EAP-LEAP ...................................................................................................................... 72
EAP-FAST ...................................................................................................................... 74
EAP-PEAP...................................................................................................................... 76
EAP-TTLS....................................................................................................................... 77
EAP-TLS......................................................................................................................... 79
Client Certificate Configuration .................................................................................... 81
System Settings - USB ................................................................................................... 82
Calibrate Page ........................................................................................................ 82
G4 Web Control Settings Page............................................................................... 83
Passwords ............................................................................................................... 84
Panel Logs Page ..................................................................................................... 86
Cache Settings Page ............................................................................................... 86
Panel Statistics Page ............................................................................................... 88
Panel Statistics - ICSP .................................................................................................... 88
Panel Statistics - Blinks Tab ........................................................................................... 89
Panel Statistics - IP Tab ................................................................................................. 89
Panel Statistics - Wireless Tab ....................................................................................... 90
Connection Utility Page ................................................................................................ 90
SIP Settings Page.................................................................................................... 91
Upgrading Firmware ........................................................................................93
Overview ................................................................................................................ 93
Upgrading Firmware via USB stick or MicroSD card ............................................... 93
Upgrading from Previous Firmware........................................................................ 95
Upgrading Firmware Via NetLinx Studio ................................................................ 95
Step 3: Confirm and Upgrade the firmware via the USB port ....................................... 97
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
3
A Special Note for Network Interface Connections ................................................ 99
Reverting the MVP-9000i to Factory Default Firmware ........................................ 101
Programming ..................................................................................................103
Overview .............................................................................................................. 103
Animated Transitions ............................................................................................ 103
^AFP .................................................................................................................................... 104
Touch Gesture Recognition................................................................................... 104
Gesture Velocity.......................................................................................................... 105
Gesture Prioritization .................................................................................................. 105
Gesture VNC/Mouse Support...................................................................................... 105
Gesture Custom Event ................................................................................................ 105
Enabling or Disabling the Gesture Custom Event ....................................................... 106
^GCE.................................................................................................................................... 106
Page Commands ................................................................................................... 107
@APG ...................................................................................................................................
@CPG ...................................................................................................................................
@DPG ...................................................................................................................................
@PDR ...................................................................................................................................
@PHE....................................................................................................................................
@PHP....................................................................................................................................
@PHT....................................................................................................................................
@PPA....................................................................................................................................
@PPF ....................................................................................................................................
@PPG ...................................................................................................................................
@PPK....................................................................................................................................
@PPM ...................................................................................................................................
@PPN ...................................................................................................................................
@PPT ....................................................................................................................................
@PPX....................................................................................................................................
@PSE ....................................................................................................................................
@PSP ....................................................................................................................................
@PST ....................................................................................................................................
PAGE....................................................................................................................................
PPOF ....................................................................................................................................
PPOG ...................................................................................................................................
PPON ...................................................................................................................................
107
107
107
107
107
108
108
108
108
109
109
109
109
110
110
110
110
110
110
111
111
111
Programming Numbers......................................................................................... 112
RGB Triplets and Names For Basic 88 Colors ............................................................. 112
Font Styles And ID Numbers ....................................................................................... 114
Border Styles And Programming Numbers ................................................................. 114
"^" Button Commands ......................................................................................... 116
^ANI.....................................................................................................................................
^APF ....................................................................................................................................
^BAT ....................................................................................................................................
^BAU....................................................................................................................................
^BCB ....................................................................................................................................
^BCF ....................................................................................................................................
4
116
116
117
117
117
118
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
^BCT.....................................................................................................................................
^BDO....................................................................................................................................
^BFB.....................................................................................................................................
^BIM .....................................................................................................................................
^BLN ....................................................................................................................................
^BMC ...................................................................................................................................
^BMF ....................................................................................................................................
^BMI .....................................................................................................................................
^BML ....................................................................................................................................
^BMP....................................................................................................................................
^BNC ....................................................................................................................................
^BNN....................................................................................................................................
^BNT ....................................................................................................................................
^BOP ....................................................................................................................................
^BOR ....................................................................................................................................
^BOS ....................................................................................................................................
^BPP.....................................................................................................................................
^BRD ....................................................................................................................................
^BSF .....................................................................................................................................
^BSM ....................................................................................................................................
^BSO ....................................................................................................................................
^BSP .....................................................................................................................................
^BVL .....................................................................................................................................
^BVN ....................................................................................................................................
^BVP.....................................................................................................................................
^BVT.....................................................................................................................................
^BWW ..................................................................................................................................
^CPF.....................................................................................................................................
^DLD ....................................................................................................................................
^DPF.....................................................................................................................................
^ENA ....................................................................................................................................
^FON....................................................................................................................................
^GDI .....................................................................................................................................
^GIV .....................................................................................................................................
^GLH ....................................................................................................................................
^GLL .....................................................................................................................................
^GRD....................................................................................................................................
^GRU ....................................................................................................................................
^GSC ....................................................................................................................................
^GSN ....................................................................................................................................
^ICO .....................................................................................................................................
^IRM .....................................................................................................................................
^JSB .....................................................................................................................................
^JSI.......................................................................................................................................
^JST......................................................................................................................................
^MBT ....................................................................................................................................
^MDC ...................................................................................................................................
^PIC......................................................................................................................................
^SHO ....................................................................................................................................
^TEC.....................................................................................................................................
^TEF .....................................................................................................................................
^TOP ....................................................................................................................................
^TXT .....................................................................................................................................
^UNI .....................................................................................................................................
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
118
118
119
119
119
120
121
123
123
123
124
124
124
124
125
125
125
125
126
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
129
129
129
129
129
130
130
130
130
131
131
131
132
132
132
132
132
133
133
133
133
134
5
^WLD ................................................................................................................................... 134
Miscellaneous MVP Strings.......................................................................................... 135
undock-<user> .....................................................................................................................
UNDOCKED .........................................................................................................................
SWAP ...................................................................................................................................
dock .....................................................................................................................................
135
135
135
135
MVP Panel Lock Passcode Commands ........................................................................ 135
^LPC..................................................................................................................................... 135
^LPR..................................................................................................................................... 135
^LPS ..................................................................................................................................... 135
Text Effects Names ............................................................................................... 136
Button Query Commands ..................................................................................... 137
?BCB ....................................................................................................................................
?BCF.....................................................................................................................................
?BCT.....................................................................................................................................
?BMP....................................................................................................................................
?BOP ....................................................................................................................................
?BRD ....................................................................................................................................
?BWW ..................................................................................................................................
?FON....................................................................................................................................
?ICO .....................................................................................................................................
?JSB .....................................................................................................................................
?JSI.......................................................................................................................................
?JST......................................................................................................................................
?TEC.....................................................................................................................................
?TEF .....................................................................................................................................
?TXT .....................................................................................................................................
138
138
139
139
140
140
141
141
142
142
143
143
144
144
145
Panel Runtime Operations .................................................................................... 146
ABEEP ..................................................................................................................................
ADBEEP................................................................................................................................
@AKB ...................................................................................................................................
AKEYB..................................................................................................................................
AKEYP ..................................................................................................................................
AKEYR..................................................................................................................................
@AKP ...................................................................................................................................
@AKR ...................................................................................................................................
BEEP.....................................................................................................................................
BRIT......................................................................................................................................
@BRT ....................................................................................................................................
DBEEP ..................................................................................................................................
@EKP....................................................................................................................................
PKEYP ..................................................................................................................................
@PKP....................................................................................................................................
SETUP ..................................................................................................................................
SHUTDOWN.........................................................................................................................
SLEEP ...................................................................................................................................
@SOU ...................................................................................................................................
@TKP ....................................................................................................................................
TPAGEON ............................................................................................................................
TPAGEOFF ...........................................................................................................................
@VKB ...................................................................................................................................
WAKE...................................................................................................................................
6
146
146
146
146
146
146
147
147
147
147
147
147
147
148
148
148
148
148
148
149
149
149
149
149
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Input Commands................................................................................................... 150
^CAL..................................................................................................................................... 150
^KPS..................................................................................................................................... 150
^VKS..................................................................................................................................... 150
Embedded codes .................................................................................................. 151
Panel Setup Commands ........................................................................................ 152
@PWD................................................................................................................................... 152
^PWD ................................................................................................................................... 152
Dynamic Image Commands................................................................................... 153
^BBR..................................................................................................................................... 153
^RAF..................................................................................................................................... 153
^RFR ..................................................................................................................................... 153
^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes ................................................................................ 154
^RMF .................................................................................................................................... 154
^RSR ..................................................................................................................................... 154
Escape Sequences ....................................................................................................... 155
$DV.......................................................................................................................................
$SY .......................................................................................................................................
$IP ........................................................................................................................................
$HN ......................................................................................................................................
$MC ......................................................................................................................................
$ID ........................................................................................................................................
$PX .......................................................................................................................................
$PY .......................................................................................................................................
$ST .......................................................................................................................................
$AC.......................................................................................................................................
$AP .......................................................................................................................................
$CC.......................................................................................................................................
$CP .......................................................................................................................................
$LC .......................................................................................................................................
$LP........................................................................................................................................
$BX .......................................................................................................................................
$BY .......................................................................................................................................
$BN ......................................................................................................................................
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
Intercom Commands............................................................................................. 156
^MODEL? .............................................................................................................................
^ICS- .....................................................................................................................................
^ICE'.....................................................................................................................................
^ICM-TALK ...........................................................................................................................
^ICM-LISTEN ........................................................................................................................
^ICM-MICLEVEL ...................................................................................................................
^ICM-MUTEMIC....................................................................................................................
^ICM-SPEAKERLEVEL...........................................................................................................
156
156
156
157
157
157
157
157
SIP Commands ...................................................................................................... 158
^PHN-AUTOANSWER...........................................................................................................
^PHN-CALL...........................................................................................................................
^PHN-DECLINE ....................................................................................................................
^PHN-INCOMING.................................................................................................................
^PHN-LINESTATE .................................................................................................................
^PHN-ANSWER ....................................................................................................................
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
158
158
158
158
158
159
7
^PHN-AUTOANSWER ..........................................................................................................
^PHN-MSGWAITING............................................................................................................
^PHN-PRIVACY ....................................................................................................................
^PHN-REDIAL ......................................................................................................................
^PHN-TRANSFERRED ..........................................................................................................
?PHN-AUTOANSWER...........................................................................................................
^PHN-CALL ..........................................................................................................................
^PHN-DTMF.........................................................................................................................
^PHN-HANGUP....................................................................................................................
^PHN-HOLD.........................................................................................................................
?PHN-LINESTATE .................................................................................................................
^PHN-PRIVACY ....................................................................................................................
?PHN-PRIVACY.....................................................................................................................
^PHN-REDIAL ......................................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-DTMFDURATION ...........................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-DOMAIN ........................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-ENABLE..........................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-PASSWORD....................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-PORT ..............................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-PROXYADDR..................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-STUNADDR ....................................................................................................
^PHN-TRANSFER .................................................................................................................
^PHN-SETUP-USERNAME ....................................................................................................
159
159
159
159
159
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
161
162
Battery Life and Replacement ........................................................................163
Overview .............................................................................................................. 163
IMPORTANT NOTES! ............................................................................................ 164
Power Management.............................................................................................. 164
Proper Battery Maintenance ................................................................................. 165
Battery Replacement ............................................................................................ 165
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST!........................................................................... 165
Replacing the Battery ........................................................................................... 166
Remove the old battery .............................................................................................. 167
Installing the new battery............................................................................................ 167
Reconnecting the battery to the device ...................................................................... 167
Appendix A: Text Formatting .........................................................................169
Text Formatting Codes for Bargraphs/Joysticks................................................... 169
Text Area Input Masking....................................................................................... 170
Input mask character types ......................................................................................... 170
Input Mask Ranges ...................................................................................................... 171
Input mask next field characters.................................................................................. 171
Input mask operations................................................................................................. 171
Input mask literals ....................................................................................................... 171
Input mask output examples ....................................................................................... 172
URL Resources ...................................................................................................... 172
Special Escape Sequences ........................................................................................... 173
8
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Complex Script Support ....................................................................................... 174
Appendix B: Wireless Technology ..................................................................175
Overview of Wireless Technology......................................................................... 175
Terminology.......................................................................................................... 176
802.1x ......................................................................................................................... 176
AES ............................................................................................................................. 176
CERTIFICATES (CA) ..................................................................................................... 176
MIC.............................................................................................................................. 176
TKIP............................................................................................................................. 176
WEP ............................................................................................................................ 176
WPA ............................................................................................................................ 176
WPA2 .......................................................................................................................... 177
EAP Authentication............................................................................................... 178
EAP Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 178
EAP Communication Overview.................................................................................... 179
Configuring Modero Firmware via the USB Port .................................................. 180
Step 1: Configure The Panel For a USB Connection Type ........................................... 180
Step 2: Prepare NetLinx Studio For Communication Via the USB Port ....................... 180
AMX Certificate Upload Utility ............................................................................. 181
Uploading a Certificate File .................................................................................. 181
Erasing All Certificates From the Touch Panel ............................................................ 182
Appendix C: Troubleshooting ........................................................................183
Overview .............................................................................................................. 183
Panel Doesn’t Respond To Touches ............................................................................ 183
Battery Will Not Hold Or Take A Charge .................................................................... 183
MVP-9000i Isn’t Appearing In The Online Tree Tab .................................................... 183
MVP Can’t Obtain a DHCP Address ............................................................................ 184
My AP Doesn’t Seem To Be Working .......................................................................... 184
NetLinx Studio Only Detects One Of My Connected Masters .................................... 184
Can’t Connect To a NetLinx Master ............................................................................ 184
Only One Modero Panel In My System Shows Up....................................................... 184
Panel Behaves Strangely After Downloading A Panel File Or Firmware ..................... 184
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
9
10
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Introduction
Introduction
Overview
The MVP-9000i redefines touch panel control offering both wireless and wired functionality, new user interface
capabilities like gestures and animated page transitions, a stunning 9" widescreen 24-bit color display, full digital duplex
VoIP telephone or intercom interface and built-in 802.11a/b/g WiFi card with antenna diversity. The MVP-9000i
switches seamlessly to wireless mode when removed from either the MVP-TDS-9 Table Docking Station or the MVPWDS-9 Wall Docking Station. Transfer touch panel pages, upgrade the firmware or display photo files using the USB or
micro-SD card slot. Available in black (FG5967-01) and white (FG5967-02), the MVP-9000i also features a capacitive
touch directional pad, 4 programmable buttons, and over 3 GB of usable flash memory. The MVP-9000i also supports 5
hours of continuous use to three days of standby time. The MVP-9000i is certified compatible with Cisco Compatible
Extensions (CCX), Version 4.
Microphone
Touch screen
Status LED
Speaker grille
FIG. 1 MVP-9000i-GB touch panel
Common Application
The MVP-9000i is ideal for a wide variety of residential and commercial control and automation applications where
flexibility of docked with wired Ethernet or undocked with 802.11a/b/g functionality is desired. This is an option for
extremely noisy wireless environments such as multiple dwelling units, as well as applications that require telephone/
intercom functionality.
Features
Available in your choice of black or white.
Capacitive touch buttons provide simple (up/down) or sophisticated control (up/down, right/left, select).
VoIP Intercom and SIP Telephone (requires AMX SIP Gateway) Ready.
802.11a/b/g WiFi for two-way network communications.
Wireless communications remain secure using WPA, WPA2, EAP-PEAP, EAP-FAST, EAP-LEAP, EAP-
TLS, and EAP-TTLS network security standards.
Enhanced usability with microphone and speakers.
Versatile placement options, including an integrated kickstand and the optional MVP-TDS-9 Table Docking
Station and MVP-WDS-9 Wall Docking Station.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
1
Introduction
The MVP-9000i comes with an integrated rear “kickstand”, allowing it to be used and displayed away from a Docking
Station (FIG. 2). It also comes with a pre-installed 802.11a/b/g wireless card.
Stylus
Capacitive touch
directional pad
Capacitive touch
buttons (4)
Kickstand
MicroSD memory
card slot
Speaker
Mini-USB port
Docking Station
interface connector
DC power jack
FIG. 2 MVP-9000i side view (with kickstand)
MVP-9000i Specifications
Models Available:
• MVP-9000i-GB (Black - FG5967-01)
• MVP-9000i-GW (White - FG5967-02)
Dimensions (HWD):
• 7.62” x 10.98” x 1.06" (19.35 cm x 27.89 cm x 2.69 cm)
Weight:
• 3.60 lbs (1.63 kg)
Enclosure:
MVP-9000i-GB: Black plastic with brushed metal retaining ring.
MVP-9000i-GW: White plastic with brushed metal retaining ring.
Memory:
• 4GB internal microSD (3.1GB accessible to user)
Power Requirements
(Without Charging):
• Constant current draw: 1.1 A @ 12 VDC
• Startup current draw: 1.2 A @ 12 VDC
• If panel is mounted onto a TDS or WDS, add 0.1 A to the above figures.
NOTE: Please see the Power Management section on page 164 for additional
information.
Power Requirements
(While Charging):
Panel while charging battery:
• Constant current draw: 2.0 A @ 12VDC
• If panel is mounted onto a TDS or WDS, add 0.1 A to the above figures.
Minimum Power Supply
Required:
• PS3.0 Power Supply (FG423-30) (included)
Power Modes:
• ON: All necessary modules are powered up and device remains online with
the NetLinx Master.
• PS-POE-AT High Power PoE Injector (FG423-81) through the Table Docking
Station and Wall Docking Station
• SLEEP: Only the backlight will be turned off after the user selectable time of
inactivity has elapsed. Panel resumes the ON mode immediately after being
touched.
• STANDBY: Power to all components other than the touch screen is turned
off after the user selectable time of inactivity has elapsed. Device will turn
back on by touching the screen. Re-acquiring an AP connection may require
up to 25 seconds. (Standby Mode does not apply if a USB or microSD card
is connected to the device. For more information, please refer to the Picture
View section on page 7.)
• SHUTDOWN: Power to all peripherals and components is turned off. The
system remains in this mode until it is restarted by applying power or
touching the screen.
Battery Duration:
• On (continuous use): 5 hours; Standby: 3 days
• 10 hours of normal use, in a combination of On, Sleep, Standby, and
Shutdown.
• 3 days of standby use
2
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Introduction
MVP-9000i Specifications (Cont.)
Panel LCD Parameters:
• Screen resolution: 800 x 480 pixels (HV) @ 60 Hz refresh rate
• Aspect ratio: 16 x 9
• Brightness (luminance): 400 cd/m2
• Channel transparency: 8-bit Alpha blending
• Contrast ratio: 900:1 max.
• Display colors: 16.7M colors (24-bit color depth)
• Dot/pixel pitch: 0.246 mm
• Panel type: TFT Color Active-Matrix (IPS technology)
• Viewing angles:
Vertical: + 85° (up from center) and - 85° (down from center)
Horizontal: + 85° (left from center) and - 85° (right from center)
External Components
Stylus Slot:
Slot where the included stylus is stored, located on the left side of the device.
MicroSD Card Slot:
Slot for insertion of standard MicroSD memory cards.
Mini-USB Connector:
5-pin Mini-USB connector used for audio output to USB headphones,
programming, firmware updates, and touch panel file transfer between the PC
and the target panel.
Note: When connecting the panel to PC using a CC-USB (or compatible)
cable, be sure to power the panel On before attempting to connect the USB
cable from the PC to the mini-USB port on the panel.
DC power port:
2.5 mm port to power the panel away from a Docking Station.
Microphone:
For use with the intercom feature and for calls using SIP.
• Frequency: 20 to 160,000 Hz
• S/N Ratio: More than 58 dB
Speaker:
• 4 Ohm
• 2 Watts 300Hz cutoff frequency
Audio Standards:
• G.711 sound standard
• 75dB SPL@1m
IR Emitters:
Transmit IR (transmit only) over 20 feet (6.10 m) from the panel.
• IR emitters on G4 panels share the device address number of the panel.
• Transmits AMX fixed frequencies at 38KHz and 455KHz and third-party
user-programmable frequencies from 20KHz to 1.5MHz
Certifications:
• FCC Class B
• CE
• IC
• VCCI
• C-Tick
•
Operating/Storage
Environment
• Operating Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 40° C (104° F)
• Battery Charging Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 30° C (86° F)
• Operating & Battery Charging Humidity: 20% to 85% RH
• Storage Temperature: -10° C (-14° F) to 60° C (140° F)
• Storage Humidity: 5% - 85% RH
Included Accessories:
• MVP-9000i Installation Guide (93-5967-01)
• PS3.0 Power Supply (FG423-30)
• Stylus (pre-installed onto the left side of the unit)
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
3
Introduction
MVP-9000i Specifications (Cont.)
Other AMX Equipment:
• MVP-TDS-9-GB Black Table Docking Station (FG5967-10)
• MVP-TDS-9-GW White Table Docking Station (FG5967-11)
• MVP-WDS-9-GB Black Wall Docking Station (FG5967-12)
• MVP-WDS-9-GW White Wall Docking Station (FG5967-13)
• CB-MVP-WDS9 Rough-In Box for Wall Docking Station (FG038-13)
• CB-MVP-WBS9B Rough-In Box Back for Wall Docking Station (FG038-14)
• MVP-STYLUS-52-XX Replacement Stylus, pack of 3 (Black: FG5966-21;
White: FG5966-22)
• CC-MINIUSB Mini USB to PC Cable Adapter (FG5967-20)
• CSG-500 Gateway for 50 Users (FG2182-01)
• CSG-544 Gateway for 50 Users, 4 analog phone input ports, 4 PSTN output
ports (FG2182-02)
• CSG-580 Gateway for 50 Users, 8 PSTN lines (FG2182-03)
• PS-POE-AT High Power PoE Injector (FG423-81)
• MicroSD card - 4GB (FG2116-81)
• MicroSD card - 8GB (FG2116-82)
• NXA-WAP1000 Smart Wireless Access Point (FG2255-51/53)
This device complies with FCC Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device must not cause harmful interference and
2. This device must accept all interference, including interference that interferes with
the operation of this device.
Memory
The MVP-9000i comes with 4GB internal MicroSD memory, 3.1GB of which is accessible to the user. This memory
may not be upgraded.
Connector Locations
With the unit facing you, the mini-USB port (for programming and downloading firmware and the DC power port are
located on the lower left side of the device (FIG. 2). The connector for the Table Docking Station (please refer to the
Table Docking Station section on page 11) is located on the bottom of the device.
Although firmware upgrades can be conducted over a wireless Ethernet connection,
transferring firmware KIT files over a wired LAN, USB data stick, or USB flash card is
recommended, and only when the panel is connected to a power supply. If battery
power is below 30 percent, and the touch panel is not connected to a power supply,
the download will not be completed.
In addition to its speaker, the MVP-9000i also utilizes its mini-USB port as a connector for standard headphones or
headsets. These headphones must use a mini-USB plug or adaptor in order to utilize this feature.
While standard input/output headsets may be used in lieu of headphones, the
headset may only be used for output. While you may receive sound from the headset,
its microphone will not function. Always use the MVP-9000i’s microphone for
receiving sound.
4
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Introduction
Basic Operation
The MVP-9000i is operated using its integral touchscreen, as well as the capacitive touch buttons on the left and the
directional pad on the right side of the device (FIG. 1). If the device has gone into its Sleep or Standby Modes, a button
press will awaken the device from Sleep Mode, but touching the screen is the only way to wake it from Standby Mode.
The MVP-9000i device’s power use allows up to 72 hours of use between rechargings of its internal battery, but its
battery charge lasts up to one month if the device goes into Shutdown Mode during that time. The device may be placed
in its charging cradle at any time and operated within its cradle, making a wired Ethernet connection in the process.
If shut down, the device will power up when placed in a Table Docking Station or Wall Docking Station, or when
external power is applied via the PS3.0 Power Supply. If the device is in Standby Mode, the device will not turn on if its
side buttons or directional pad are touched or the device is docked. Touching the screen is the only way to wake an MVP9000i from Standby Mode.
Any wired connection intended for the device will be reconnected within approximately twenty seconds after the device
is placed in a Table Docking Station or Wall Docking Station. Depending upon its settings, the device may be set to go
into On Mode as soon as it is placed in the Docking Station.
Powering on the MVP-9000i
The MVP-9000i may be powered on by touching and holding the touchscreen. If the device was in Sleep Mode, it will
automatically turn on when put into a Table or Wall Docking Station.
Intercom Microphone
The MVP-9000i contains a built-in microphone above the upper lefthand corner of the touch screen for video and audio
conferencing capabilities. This microphone is concealed by the casing.
Stylus
The MVP-9000i comes with a unique touchscreen stylus that slides into a storage groove on the left side of the device
when not in use. Replacement styluses may be ordered in a 3-pack (black, FG5966-21; white, FG5966-22) from
www.amx.com.
Kick Stand
Since the MVP-9000i device is designed to be a unit used away from its docking station, it has an extendable “kickstand”
on the back of the unit (FIG. 2). This may be opened by physically lifting the free end of the kick stand away from the
device. The device may then be propped up on a flat surface and accessed in a normal fashion.
Audio/Video Capabilities
The MVP-9000i has the capability of displaying multiple JPEG and PNG files at one time. The device also supports
streaming motion JPEG video (of the sort used by many IP and Web cameras) and hardware acceleration of Motion
JPEG (previously configured in TPDesign4), as well as MP3 and WAV audio files.
Power Management
The MVP-9000i utilizes a dual voltage external power supply. It may be recharged through the supplied PS3.0 Power
Supply (FG423-30), as well as through the MVP-TDS-9 Table Docking Station (FG5967-1X) or the MVP-WDS-9 Wall
Docking Station (FG5967-1X). For more information, see the Accessories section on page 11 for details.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
5
Introduction
Charging Lithium Polymer batteries at high temperature will reduce the battery life.
Industry guidelines dictate that batteries should not be charged at temperatures
above 45° C (113° F). The temperature is determined by a combination of the
ambient temperature where the panel is located, plus temperature increases
normally occurring inside electronic devices containing batteries. AMX has
implemented battery temperature monitoring features to maximize the rate of battery
charging, while staying within industry temperature guidelines.
Battery charge times will increase in installations where the room temperature is
above 25° C (77° F), and may be temporarily suspended at room temperatures
above 30° C (86° F). Battery charging will automatically resume once the
temperature has fallen to appropriate levels. Minimizing the display backlight intensity
and turning off the backlight during periods of non-use will also yield faster charge
times.
Although the MVP-9000i unit is equipped with a mini-USB port, the device cannot be
powered through the USB port. The port is only used for uploading firmware.
When not in active use, the MVP-9000i conserves battery life between chargings. Pressing the touch screen will return
the device to its On Mode. For more information on the battery, see the Battery Life and Replacement section on
page 163.
Cleaning the Touch Overlay and Case
Always use a clean cotton cloth and a spray bottle containing water or any standard ammonia-free glass cleaner can be
used to clean the touch screen. Do NOT use alcohol-based cleaners, as alcohol-based cleaners can damage the device’s
touch screen overlay.
Do not directly spray the device: instead, spray the cloth to clean the touch screen overlay.
Do NOT use an abrasive of any type to clean the MVP-9000i, as this may permanently damage or remove the
device’s finish.
6
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Introduction
Picture View
With Picture View, inserting a microSD memory card into the slot on the left side of the device, or connecting a USB
drive via the mini-USB port (FIG. 2), allows the MVP-9000i to access JPEG images on that card and display them on the
touchscreen (FIG. 3). Individual images may be accessed at any time, or the entire collection may be displayed for
predetermined times. Picture View may be stopped at any time by removing the memory card or USB drive, and the
MVP-9000i will return to its default display page.
Picture View is disabled on the MVP-9000i by default, and must be enabled or
disabled with the ^PIC Send Command. For more information, please refer to the
^PIC section on page 132.
FIG. 3 Picture View display
The maximum resolution of any image to be viewed in Picture View is 1280 x1024
pixels. Images larger than this should be reformatted before being added to a USB
stick or MicroSD card.
To start Picture View:
1. Connect a USB drive to the device or insert a microSD memory card into the microSD memory card slot. Picture
View will automatically recognize all available images on the drive or memory card and start displaying them on
the touchscreen.
2. When the images begin to display, touch any place on the touchscreen to open the configuration popup menu
(FIG. 4). If no selection is made, this menu will remain in place for 15 seconds and then disappear. It may be
accessed again by touching anywhere on the touchscreen.
3. On the leftmost red button, select between Rand (images display at random) and A-Z (images display in
alphabetical order based on the name of the file).
4. The four blue buttons allow scrolling through saved images and the rate of display:
The Previous button returns the display to the previously displayed image.
The Stop button stops Page View and returns to the default panel page.
The Pause/Resume button allows the display to stop on one particular image. Press it again to resume the
display procession.
The Next button moves the display to the next stored image. If the MPVP-9000i has not accessed all of the
images available on a USB drive or memory card, Page View will display the last one uploaded to date.
5. On the rightmost red button, select the number of seconds a selected image will be displayed in Picture View. This
may be selected between 5, 10, 15, 30, and 60 seconds.
6. The counter beneath the buttons displays the number of images currently uploaded by the MVP-9000i versus the
number detected on the USB drive or microSD card.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
7
Introduction
Stop
Random/
A-Z
Counter
Previous
Timer
Pause/
Resume
Next
FIG. 4 Picture View configuration popup menu
Preview Mode and Normal Mode
Picture View has two modes: Preview Mode and Normal Mode. Preview Mode allows the user to configure Picture View.
Once an SD card or a USB drive containing images is inserted into the panel, the images will begin to display. Touching
any place on the display will result in the configuration popup to slide from the bottom of the display.
Picture View goes into its Normal Mode when the MVP-9000i goes into idle timeout while connected to a USB drive or
memory card. Normal Mode displays images until the touchscreen or capacitive touch buttons are touched, or some other
wakeup event is detected. When the device goes back into timeout, Normal Mode will return to displaying images until
the USB drive or memory card are removed from the device.
Picture View Send Command
Picture View must be enabled or disabled with the ^PIC Send Command. For more information, please refer to the
^PIC section on page 132.
All images must be in JPEG format. PNG and other image formats cannot be viewed
through Picture View.
8
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Introduction
Seamless Wireless to Wired Swap
The MVP-9000i's unique design allows for wireless as well as wired connectivity with the appropriate Table Docking
Station or Wall Docking Station. To prevent offline events when transitioning between wired and wireless connectivity,
the MVP-9000i allows for seamless swapping. For swapping to work correctly, the Wired (page 65) and WiFi (page 66)
network settings must be configured properly. The current connection mode to the master is indicated by the connection
icon in the upper right hand corner of the setup pages as well as in the Current Connection field in the System Settings
page under the Master tab.
Refer to the Miscellaneous MVP Strings section on page 135 for strings that are sent to the master when the panel is
docked and undocked.
Swapping between wired and wireless connections is only supported when the
Master Mode is set to URL. For more information, please refer to the System Settings
Page on page 64.
To swap from a wireless connection to a wired one, simply place the panel in a Table Docking Station or Wall Docking
Station. To swap from a wired connection to a wireless connection, you must first initiate an undock request. This can be
done with the undock button on the Docking Station, or with the Undock Panel button in the System & Panel Options
page (please refer to the System & Panel Options page on page 60). The swap will happen once a valid password is
entered (if enabled). If the panel does not swap to the master immediately, a Confirmation Dialog popup will notify the
user (FIG. 5). The user has the option to force an undock which will cause an offline event, or to cancel the undocking
and remain in the dock. If the swap is completed sometime after the popup is displayed, the popup will disappear
automatically. The popup will also disappear after a 15-second countdown.
FIG. 5 “Attempting to Undock” popup window
If an undock is initiated during a VoIP call or Dynamo session, pressing the Yes
button ends all VoIP calls in progress and Dynamo sessions.
After a successful swap from wired to wireless communication, if the panel is not removed from a Table Docking Station
after 30 seconds, the dock will automatically lock the latch and swap back to wired communication.
The firmware version of the Master controller must support swapping.
If the user does not want to use the mechanical latch on the TDS or utilize the swapping feature, the Table Dock Latch
button may be disabled or set to Off in the System & Panel Options page.
If an undock is initiated during a VoIP call or a Dynamo session, a warning popup will be displayed (FIG. 6), allowing
the user to proceed with the undock and disconnect sessions or calls, or cancel the undock
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
9
Introduction
FIG. 6 Confirmation Dialog popup window for undocking
10
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Accessories
Accessories
Table Docking Station
The Power-over-Ethernet MVP-TDS-9 Table Docking Station (FIG. 7) charges the MVP-9000i and provides a wired
Ethernet connection when the panel is docked. The MVP-TDS-9's sleek design allows the panel to slide into perfect
placement in the docking station and includes password protection support for panel removal. When the MVP-9000i is
placed into the PoE docking station, it automatically switches from wireless to wired Ethernet communication. The
Docking Station is available in either black (MVP-TDS-9-GB, FG5967-10) or white (MVP-TDS-9-GW, FG5967-11).
Docking Station cradle
Release button
FIG. 7 MVP-TDS-9-GB Table Docking Station - Front
MVP-TDS-9 Specifications
Dimensions (HWD):
• 6.25” x 11.50” x 5.50” (15.88cm x 29.21cm x 13.97cm)
Weight:
• 1.25 lbs (.57 kg)
Power
Requirements:
• 30 W (Class II listed power supplemented), supplied via the PS-POE-AT HighPower PoE Injector.
Startup Power
Requirements:
• Cradle and panel (not charging): 16 W
• Cradle and panel (charging): 23 W
• Ejection: 23 W
Front
Components:
• Docking Station cradle: for supporting the device while connected or charging.
• Release button: before removing the MVP touch panel, press this button to switch
the panel from a wired to a wireless Ethernet connection to its network.
• 12-pin charging connector on bottom of device cradle.
Rear
Components:
• 2 USB ports on the left side of the device, for firmware or file download to a docked
touch panel. These ports may also be used for using a keyboard and/or mouse
with the touch panel.
Operating/Storage
Environments:
• Operating Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 40° C (104° F)
• Battery Charging Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 30° C (86° F)
• Operating & Battery Charging Humidity: 20% to 85% RH
• Storage Temperature: -10° C (-14° F) to 60° C (140° F)
• Storage Humidity: 5% - 85% RH
Included
Accessories
• MVP-TDS-9 Table Docking Station Installation Guide (93-5967-10)
• PS-POE-AT High Power PoE Injector (FG423-81)
• Ethernet cable - black (ECA5967-22BL) (for MVP-TDS-9-GB)
• Ethernet cable - white (ECA5967-22WH) (for MVP-TDS-9-GW)
Other AMX
Equipment:
• MVP-9000i Modero Viewpoint Widescreen Touch Panel with Intercom - Black
(FG5967-01)
• MVP-9000i Modero Viewpoint Widescreen Touch Panel with Intercom - White
(FG5967-02)
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
11
Accessories
Powering the MVP-TDS-9
The MVP-TDS-9 uses the PS-POE-AT High-Power PoE Injector (FG423-81) to provide direct power for the MVP panel
via a standard Ethernet connection, both for standard function and for charging its internal battery. This also allows a
wired Ethernet connection for the panel, and the panel may be used normally while docked in the MVP-TDS-9 without
the need for a wireless connection.
Use only the RJ45 plug on the included Ethernet cable with the MVP-TDS-9. Other
RJ45 plugs will not fit in the device’s jack, and attempting to use another plug may
damage the jack. If necessary, the cable may be spliced and shortened for special
installations.
For both Ethernet connection and for power for the MVP-9000i, the MVP-TDS-9 uses a special Ethernet cable (FIG. 8)
in order to connect to the PS-POE-AT.
To Ethernet cable connected
to PS-POE-AT
To input port on
the MVP-TDS-9
FIG. 8 MVP-TDS-9 cable
To connect the MVP-TDS-9 to the PS-POE-AT via the special Ethernet cable:
1. Connect the terminal end of the cable to the PWR connector on the bottom of the MVP-TDS-9.
2. To prevent wear on the power supply cord and assure that the device’s base is in full contact with the table surface,
press the cord into the locking groove running across the bottom of the device (FIG. 9).
3. The other end of the included Ethernet cable has an input port, intended for a standard RJ45 jack. Use a standard
Ethernet cable to connect the Ethernet/PoE port to the PS-POE-AT plugging the other end of the Ethernet cable into
the Data & Power Out RJ45 port on the PS-POE-AT. Make sure that the PS-POE-AT’s power cable is connected to
the device and to an available power source, and that the incoming Ethernet cable accessing the Data In RJ45 jack is
connected to the desired network.
4. Place the touch panel in the Docking Station cradle, guiding it into place with the locking grooves on each side of
the cradle (FIG. 9). When fully seated, the touch panel’s Docking Station connector should be in contact with the
Docking Station’s charger pins.
12
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Accessories
Recharging
To recharge the MVP-9000i, slide the device into the Table Docking Station cradle bottom-first and make sure the device
is fully seated in the Docking Station. The charger pins in the bottom of the cradle (FIG. 9) must be in contact with the
connector on the bottom of the MVP-9000i for it to start recharging. The MVP panel will stop recharging automatically
once the battery has achieved its maximum charge.
Docking Station cradle
Charger pins
USB ports (2)
Locking groove
FIG. 9 MVP-TDS-9-GW Table Docking Station - Rear
Using the USB ports
The MVP-TDS-9 has two USB ports on the left of the device behind the Docking Station cradle (FIG. 9). These ports
may be used for transferring files to the MVP-9000i, as well as ports for USB-powered accessories.
Undocking the Touch Panel
For information on removing a touch panel locked into the MVP-TDS-9, please refer to the Undocking from the MVPTDS-9 or MVP-WDS-9 on page 22.
Cleaning the MVP-TDS-9
You should clean the MVP-TDS-9 Table Docking Station after each day’s use to maintain the device’s appearance.
Always use a clean cotton cloth and a spray bottle containing water or a non-ammonia-based cleaner, as alcohol-based
cleaners can damage the device. Do not directly spray the device: instead, spray the cloth to prevent moisture from
collecting on the charger pins. Do NOT use an abrasive of any type to clean the Table Docking Station, as this may
permanently damage or remove the device’s finish.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
13
Accessories
Wall Docking Station
While charging the MVP-9000i, the Power-over-Ethernet MVP-WDS-9 Wall/Flush Mount Docking Station provides
fast, reliable wired Ethernet communication to the touch panel. In addition, the MVP-WDS-9 employs a unique, antitheft locking mechanism to keep the touch panel safe and secure. With a push of a button, the panel glides forward for
simple removal and transport. The Wall Docking Station is available in either white (FG5967-13) or black (FG596712).
MVP-WDS-9
MVP-9000i
Security Release button
FIG. 10 MVP-WDS-9-GB Wall Docking Station - Front
The features of the MVP-WDS-9 include:
Touch panel password feature for security
Integrated docking alignment guides for easy docking.
MVP-WDS-9 Specifications
Dimensions (HWD):
• 9.75" x 12.50" x 2.13" (24.77cm x 31.75cm x 5.40cm)
Note: Always use the cutout/installation dimensions for the MVP-WDS-9 when
installing this unit into various surfaces. A cutout template is included with the
device for ease of installation.
Power Requirements:
• 30 W (Class II listed power supplemented), supplied via the PS-POE-AT HighPower PoE Injector.
Startup Power
Requirements
• Cradle and panel (not charging): 16 W
• Cradle and panel (charging): 23 W
• Ejection: 23 W
Weight:
• Without back box: 1.50 lbs (0.68 kg)
• With back box: 2.40 lbs (1.09 kg)
Front Panel
Components:
• Securing Magnets: Secures MVP touch panel during ejection.
• Security Latch: Adds the primary layer of security when mounting an MVP touch
panel. When the device is inserted, this latch grabs onto the rear of the touch panel
and secures it to prevent it from inadvertently being removed.
• Interface Connector: A set of contacts that connect to the underside MVP
connector strip. This connection provides both communication and power between
the touch panel and the MVP-WDS-9.
• Support Cradle: This retractable mechanism supports a resting MVP panel and
allows a user to either insert or remove a connected MVP panel.
• Security Release pushbutton: Located on the front of the unit, this pushbutton
toggles an on-screen security keypad if security is enabled.
- Entering the correct release code allows the MVP-WDS-9 to release the touch
panel from the security latch.
14
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Accessories
MVP-WDS-9 Specifications (Cont.)
Operating/Storage
Environments:
• Operating Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 40° C (104° F)
• Battery Charging Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 30° C (86° F)
• Operating & Battery Charging Humidity: 20% to 85% RH
• Storage Temperature: -10° C (-14° F) to 60° C (140° F)
• Storage Humidity: 5% - 85% RH
Included Accessories
• MVP-WDS-9 Wall Docking Station Installation Guide (93-5967-12)
• Snap-On Ferrite (04-0007)
• MVP-WDS-9 Wall Docking Station Template (68-5967-01)
• PS-POE-AT High Power PoE Injector (FG423-81)
Other AMX
Equipment:
• MVP-9000i-GB Modero Wireless Touch Panel, Black (FG5967-01)
• MVP-9000i-GW Modero Wireless Touch Panel, White (FG5967-02)
• MVP-TDS-9-GB Black Table Docking Station (FG5967-10)
• MVP-TDS-9-GW White Table Docking Station (FG5967-11)
• CB-MVP-WDS9 Rough-In Box (FG038-13)
The MVP-9000i touch panel remains locked in the MVP-WDS-9 until unlocked by the user. This may be done by
entering an appropriate password (please refer to the Passwords section on page 84 for more information), or by pressing
the Security Release button on the front of the device in emergencies. The station ejects the device top first. The device
uses two neodymium rare-earth magnets to keep the MVP-9000i from falling out of its cradle when the touch panel is
angled forward.
Wall Docking Station
MVP-9000i
Security Release button
FIG. 11 MVP-WDS-9-GB Wall Docking Station - Side view
Unlocking the Touch Panel
For information on removing a touch panel locked into the MVP-WDS-9, please refer to the Undocking from the MVPTDS-9 or MVP-WDS-9 on page 22.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
15
Accessories
Recharging
To recharge the MVP-9000i:
1. Slide the device into the Wall Docking Station cradle bottom-first and make sure the device is fully seated in the
Docking Station (FIG. 12).
MVP-9000i
MVP-WDS-9
FIG. 12 Inserting the MVP-9000i into the MVP-WDS-9
2. Press the top of the MVP-9000i back until it clicks. The touch panel is now locked into the Docking Station, and the
station will automatically charge the device’s battery. (Please refer to the Power Management Page section on
page 47 to check on the battery charge status.)
3. To release the touch panel, unlock the touch panel and wait for the Wall Docking Station to pivot the touch panel
away from the wall (FIG. 20).
16
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Accessories
A Note About Wall and Rack Installation
Some products are installed in areas of differing temperature and cooling methodologies. These include products
installed in walls, racks, cabinets, etc. Those areas may have different temperatures and/or cooling approaches that must
be taken into consideration to maintain the product within the specified operating temperature.
FIG. 13 shows an AMX device installed in a wall with a filled volume (such as with insulation or concrete), as well as
with a closed volume (such as between studs in an otherwise finished wall). The diagram shows how heat generated by
the device or other devices may have no way to escape, and may build up to levels that may affect device operation.
FIG. 13 Heat convection in filled or closed volume, limited or no convection
In FIG. 14, the diagram displays an AMX device in a typical rack mounting, with full air circulation around the front and
back of the device. In this case, the main concern is with heat building up between components, possibly to levels that
may affect device operation.
FIG. 14 Heat convection in rack-mounted devices
Installation Recommendations
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
17
Accessories
During any installation, a lack of ventilation may produce conditions that may adversely affect the device’s operation. In
these circumstances, special care must be made to make sure that temperatures within enclosed areas do not exceed the
device’s maximum rated temperature.
While the outside temperature of the device may be at or below its maximum
operating temperature, special care must be taken before and during installation to
ensure that the maximum operating temperature is not exceeded within wall or rack
installation spaces.
Installing the MVP-WDS-9
Since the Wall Docking Station is intended to be affixed to a wall or other permanent structure, care must be taken to
ensure its proper installation to prevent potential damage to the MVP-9000i placed within.
Other than wall installation tools, the only tool required for this installation is a #2
Phillips screwdriver.
Installing the Wall Docking Station and Plastic Back Box
The Plastic Back Box has two pairs of knockouts at the top of the box and four (4) lockdown wings attached to the box
with Phillips-head screws. For ease of installation, the interior of the box contains an “UP” arrow pointing to the
knockouts.
The optional CB-MVP-WDS9 Metal Rough-In Box is not required for installation of
the supplied Plastic Back Box, but it offers an extra level of support.
To install the Plastic Back Box:
1. Cut a hole into the wall or surface intended to hold the back box. The back box is sized 12 1/16 inches (30.64 cm)
long and 8 11/16 inches (22.07 cm) high, so the hole should be at least 1/4” (6.4mm) smaller in each dimension
(FIG. 15). Use the included MVP-WDS-9 Wall Docking Station template (68-5967-01) as an aid for hole
placement and measurement.
12.06"
8.25"cm)
(30.64
(212.7mm
8.69"
5.56"cm)
(22.07
(141.29mm)
8.69"
5.56"cm)
(22.07
(141.29mm)
12.06"
8.25"
(30.64 cm)
(212 7mm)
FIG. 15 Recommended cutout for the MVP-WDS-9 plastic back box
18
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Accessories
Make sure to measure the size of the intended hole before starting to cut it. Cutting
the hole slightly smaller than the dimensions to allow for adjustments is highly
recommended.
2. Select the knockout to be removed from the top of the box. The box has two knockouts, at the top left and the top
right.
To assist with wiring, and to avoid mechanical stresses on the wire and the
mechanism of the Wall Docking Station, the top left knockout, when viewing the
device from the rear, is preferred for use for Ethernet installation. Use the top right
knockout for USB cable connection.
3. Connect the PS-POE-AT High-Power PoE Injector to a power source. Connect the PS-POE-AT to an Ethernet
switch on the network via one length of Ethernet cable and insert one length of Ethernet cable for connection to the
Wall Docking Station.
4. Run the Ethernet cable through the knockout into the back box. Pull out about six inches (15.25cm) of cable into the
back box to facilitate installation of the MVP-WDS-9.
5. Slide the plastic back box into the hole, being careful not to twist or pinch the cable, and set it flush with the wall.
Make sure that all of the lockdown wings are folded into their slots before attempting to insert the box.
For ease of installation, the inside of the box has the direction “UP” labeled for reference.
6. Extend the wings on the sides of the box by tightening the screws inside the box.
Not all of the wings must be extended to lock the box in place, but extending a minimum of the top and
bottom wings is highly recommended.
Apply enough pressure to the screw head to keep the box flush with the wall: this ensures that the wing will
tighten up against the inside of the wall.
Make absolutely certain that the box is in its intended position. Once the box
lockdown wings are extended within the box’s hole within the wall, removing the box
will be extremely difficult without damaging the wall in the process.
The maximum recommended torque to screw in the wings on the plastic back box is
5 IN-IBS [5(NI-CM)]. Applying excessive torque while tightening the wing screws,
such as with powered screwdrivers, can strip out the wings or damage the plastic
back box.
7. Attach the included snap-on ferrite to the Ethernet cable, as close to the RJ-45 connector as possible. Attach the
cable to the Ethernet Port (FIG. 16).
Recommended USB installation
Recommended Ethernet installation
Knockout placement
in back box
Ethernet port
Ferrite installation
position
Recommended
Ethernet cable
path
FIG. 16 MVP-WDS-9 - Ethernet cable path
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
19
Accessories
8. Firmly seat the device against the back box. Make sure that the tab connector at the bottom of the device is locked
into the back box.
9. Insert the two installation screws from the MVP-WDS-9 Installation Kit into the screw holes in the interior
compartment of the device and tighten them to anchor the device to the back box.
For ease of installation, put each screw on a neodymium magnet in the device’s
interior compartment to keep them on hand until they are needed.
10. After fully seating the screws, wipe down the area around the screw holes with the alcohol prep pad from the
Installation Kit. Take a rubber foot and remove its adhesive backing. Put the foot, adhesive-side down, in the slot
surrounding the screw hole in the Wall Docking Station. Press down firmly to remove any air bubbles from
underneath the foot.
11. Install an MVP-9000i device by placing it into the interior compartment bottom-first. Press the top of the touch
panel until it is flush with the Wall Docking Station. The neodymium magnets will hold it in place.
12. To remove the MVP-9000i, unlock the touch panel (see the Unlocking the Touch Panel section on page 15 for more
information) and wait for the touch panel to pull away from the Wall Docking Station. Once it has been released,
grip it by the top of the device, and pull it free from the Docking Station.
Installing the Optional Metal Rough-In Box
The optional metal rough-in box (FG038-13) is 11.97 inches (30.40cm) wide at its widest dimension (wider than the
bezel of the Wall Docking Station), and is only intended for pre-construction installations (FIG. 17). The Metal RoughIn Box is used in conjunction with the Wall Docking Station’s plastic back box.
In order to guarantee a stable installation of the MVP-WDS-9, the distance between
the CB-MVP-WDS9 and the outer wall surface must be a minimum of .50 inches
(1.27cm) and a maximum of .1.50 inches (3.81cm).
.
Dry Wall Clips
Screws for
Dry Wall Clips
B
A
Front Cover
Mounting Screws
FIG. 17 CB-MVP-WDS9 Rough-In Box - with front cover
Pre-Wall Installation of the CB-MVP-WDS9
1. Remove the rough-in box cover (A in FIG. 17) before installation of the Rough-In Box (B).
The cover MUST be removed before drywall installation. The cover may be
reinstalled after drywall installation using 4-40 screws (not included).
20
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Accessories
2. Fasten the CB-MVP-WDS9 rough-in box to the stud through the holes on the Stud Mounting Tabs, using either
nails or screws (not provided).
Ensure that the metal rough-in box is flush with the 2x4 studs. Any overhang will
affect the installation of the covering sheetrock, as well as affect the placement of the
Plastic Back Box.
3. Remove the appropriate wiring knockouts from the rough-in box to accommodate the cables being threaded
through to the MVP-WDS-9.
Make sure that the power cable has been pulled through the metal rough-in box by
the resident electrician before continuing the installation.
4. Thread the incoming Ethernet and USB wiring through the knockouts. Using the left wiring knockouts for USB
connector cables and the right wiring knockouts for the LAN/PoE In cable is very highly recommended with this
installation. Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate installation of the docking station.
5. Install the drywall/sheetrock before inserting the back box for the CB-MVP-WDS9.
6. Cut out the opening for the MVP-WDS-9 where the wall has been placed over the Rough-In Box. Cutting out the
surface slightly smaller than what is outlined in the installation drawings, so that you can make any necessary cutout
adjustments, is very highly recommended.
Other MVP-WDS-9 installations
The Wall-Mounted Docking Station is designed to be installed in various different locations, such as into the face of a
wooden podium or the top of a table. Depending upon the ability to wire it to a power source, Wall-Mounted Docking
Stations may be installed on vertical or horizontal surfaces composed of such materials as wood, brick, and glass.
Installing a Wall-Mounted Docking Station into a solid wall thicker than a standard thickness of sheetrock is possible,
but requires special preparation. If installing into a solid wall of concrete or rock, a recess must be chiselled or cut out to
match the size of the device. The box is sized 8.375 inches (21.27cm) long and 5.75 inches (14.60cm) high, so the hole
should be at least 1/4” (0.64cm) smaller in these dimensions. To facilitate the full range of movement of the device’s
components, the recess must be at least 2.69 inches (6.83cm) deep.
Ensure that the power cable has been installed in the wall and is accessible by the
installer before chiseling out the recess.
Instead of using the lockdown wings to secure the Plastic Back Box, standard
concrete screws may be inserted through the screw holes after removing the
lockdown wings.
However, drill the concrete screw holes into the wall before setting the screws into the
box, as excessive torque applied to the screws will damage the box.
To avoid this, the box may be installed with adhesive. Test an unobtrusive spot on the
back of the box with a sample of the adhesive to check for any adverse reactions
before installing the device.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
21
Accessories
Undocking from the MVP-TDS-9 or MVP-WDS-9
Once placed within either the Table Docking Station or the Wall Docking Station, the MVP-9000i remains secured until
the user unlocks it. A ten-second lag between the touch panel being placed in either Docking Station and the security
feature enabling allows the user to remove the touch panel if it is accidentally put into the device. To release the touch
panel from either Docking Station:
1. Press the Release button (see FIG. 7 for the Table Docking Station or FIG. 11 for the Wall Docking Station).
2. A password keypad will pop up on the MVP-9000i screen. Enter a password in the password keypad and press
Enter.
Unique passwords may be entered for up to four unique users as well as the
administrator. For more information on setting passwords, please refer to the
Passwords section on page 84.
3. If the MVP-9000i was conducting a SIP call or Dynamo session at this time, a confirmation dialog window appears
to warn that any open sessions or calls will end (FIG. 18). Click Yes to undock the panel and disconnect the call/
session, or No to keep the panel in the Docking Station and continue the call/session.
FIG. 18 Undocking confirmation dialog window
4. When disconnecting from a Docking Station, the MVP-9000i will attempt to switch from a Wired to Wireless
connection. If the touch panel is unable to connect to a wireless network, a confirmation window appears warning
that the panel will lose its network connection (FIG. 19). Press Undock if you still wish to remove the touch panel,
or Cancel to keep the panel in the Docking Station. If you do not choose either option, the undocking attempt will
automatically cancel within 15 seconds.
FIG. 19 “Attempting to Undock” confirmation window
22
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Accessories
5. When disconnecting from a Wall Docking Station, wait for the Wall Docking Station to pivot the touch panel away
from the wall (FIG. 20).
MVP-WDS-9
MVP-9000i
FIG. 20 Ejected position for the MVP-9000i
6. Remove the device. The device will remain in the ejected position in the MVP-WDS-9 until the MVP-9000i is
removed. Wait until the MVP-WDS-9’s ejection door has completely withdrawn before re-installing the MVP9000i.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
23
Accessories
24
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Configuring Communication
Configuring Communication
Overview
All control for a MVP-9000i touch panel is established through a NetLinx Master. Communication between the MVP
and the Master consists of using wired LAN, Wireless Ethernet (DHCP, Static IP) or USB. References to Ethernet in this
manual focus on the use of Wireless Ethernet via the MVP’s WiFi Card.
Before commencing, verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master and Modero
panel-specific firmware. Verify you are using the latest versions of AMX’s NetLinx
Studio and TPDesign4 programs.
In the example below (FIG. 21), three MVP-9000i devices are shown at varying distances from an AP gateway. As with
any other AP network, the gateway is spaced so as to allow a maximum wireless coverage for the three devices.
Panel 1
Network Master
IP
Network
Panel 2
802.11a/b/g AP
Panel 3
FIG. 21 System Deployment Diagram
When initially installing the MVP-9000i, some basic configuration items, including network settings and NetLinx
settings, will need to be set. For more information, refer to the Protected Setup Pages section on page 59.
The MVP-9000i defaults to Auto mode for its Master connection.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
25
Configuring Communication
IR Communication
In certain situations, the MVP-9000i may be used as an infrared remote device for other AMX controllers. The device
can transmit IR over 20 feet (6.10 m) from the panel at AMX frequencies of 38KHz and 455KHz, and third-party device
frequencies between 20KHz and 120KHz. IR receivers and transmitters on G4 panels share the device address number of
the panel.
The MVP-9000i includes an IR transmitter for communication between the device and the NetLinx Master and between
separate devices. The transmitter is located behind the IR Emitter Panel on the rear of the device (FIG. 22).
IR Emitter Panel
FIG. 22 IR transmitter window on the MVP-9000i-GB
Modero Setup and System Settings
All AMX Modero panels, including the MVP-9000i, feature on-board Setup pages. Use the options in the Setup pages to
access panel information and make various configuration changes.
Accessing the Setup and Protected Setup Pages
1. At any time, hold the bottom left capacitive touch button and the bottom of the directional pad for 3 seconds.
Alternately, press the Reset button on the left side of the device and hold it for 6 seconds. (For more information,
please refer to the Accessing the Setup pages section on page 43.) This opens the Setup page (FIG. 23).
FIG. 23 Setup page
26
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Configuring Communication
2. Press the Protected button. This opens a popup keypad for password entry. Enter the device’s password and press
Done to proceed to the Protected Setup page (FIG. 24).
FIG. 24 Protected Setup password popup window
The default password for the Protected Setup page is 1988, but this may be changed
at any time.
For more information on the Setup and Protected Setup pages, refer to the Setup Pages section on page 43 and the
Protected Setup Pages section on page 59.
Setting the Panel’s Device Number
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Press the Device Number field in the Device Information section to open the Device Number keypad.
2. Enter a unique Device Number assignment for the device, and press Done to return to the Protected Setup page. The
Device Number default is 0.
3. From the Setup page, press Reboot to reboot the device and apply the new Device Number.
Wireless Settings - Wireless Access Overview
DHCP
When choosing DHCP, a DHCP server must be accessible before the IP, subnet, and gateway fields are populated.
The parameters of the wireless card must be set before selecting the Master Connection Type. The Access Point
communication parameters must match those of the pre-installed wireless CF card inside the device.
MVP touch panels connect to a wireless network through the use of a pre-installed AMX 802.11a/b/g wireless interface
card. This allows users to communicate via a wireless LAN. For a more detailed explanation of the new security and
encryption technology, refer to the Appendix B: Wireless Technology section on page 175.
For more information on utilizing the AMX Certificate Upload Utility in conjunction with the EAP security, refer to the
AMX Certificate Upload Utility section on page 181.
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS)
Certain frequencies in the 802.11a operational bands are available for restricted use because of the presence of radar
systems and other communications technologies on those bands. 802.11a technology is allowed to work on those
frequencies, but only if it implements an optional feature called Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS). DFS allows Wi-Fi
devices to avoid interference by automatically navigating out of the way of other users of the band. Because this can
result in connection loss while the network is moving to the new frequency, AMX has restricted the 5GHz operation at
this time to only those channels that are allowed without supporting DFS. While this restricts the number of usable
channels, it avoids the network complications that might be present when using DFS-restricted channels.
The following table shows the currently allowed channels for some of the most common regions in which the MVP9000i may be used. Verifying which channels are available in a particular frequency in your area is highly recommended.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
27
Configuring Communication
MVP-9000i Wireless Channel Support
Frequency North
America
Europe
Australia
Japan
Israel
India
Saudi
Arabia
UAE
5GHz
Channel 36:
5.18 GHz
Channel 36:
5.18 GHz
Channel 36:
5.18 GHz
Channel 36:
5.18 GHz
Channel 36:
5.18 GHz
Channel 36:
5.18 GHz
Channel 36:
5.18 GHz
Channel 36:
5.18 GHz
Channel 40:
5.2 GHz
Channel 40:
5.2 GHz
Channel 40:
5.2 GHz
Channel 40:
5.2 GHz
Channel 40:
5.2 GHz
Channel 40:
5.2 GHz
Channel 40:
5.2 GHz
Channel 40:
5.2 GHz
Channel 44:
5.22 GHz
Channel 44:
5.22 GHz
Channel 44:
5.22 GHz
Channel 44:
5.22 GHz
Channel 44:
5.22 GHz
Channel 44:
5.22 GHz
Channel 44:
5.22 GHz
Channel 44:
5.22 GHz
Channel 48:
5.24 GHz
Channel 48:
5.24 GHz
Channel 48:
5.24 GHz
Channel 48:
5.24 GHz
Channel 48:
5.24 GHz
Channel 48:
5.24 GHz
Channel 48:
5.24 GHz
Channel 48:
5.24 GHz
2.4GHz
Channel 149:
5.745 GHz
Channel 149:
5.745 GHz
Channel 149:
5.745 GHz
Channel 149:
5.745 GHz
Channel 153:
5.765 GHz
Channel 153:
5.765 GHz
Channel 153:
5.765 GHz
Channel 153:
5.765 GHz
Channel 157:
5.785 GHz
Channel 157:
5.785 GHz
Channel 157:
5.785 GHz
Channel 157:
5.785 GHz
Channel 161:
5.805 GHz
Channel 161:
5.805 GHz
Channel 161:
5.805 GHz
Channel 161:
5.805 GHz
Channel 165:
5.825 GHz
Channel 165:
5.825 GHz
Channel 165:
5.825 GHz
Channel 165:
5.825 GHz
Channel 01:
2.412 GHz
Channel 01:
2.412 GHz
Channel 01:
2.412 GHz
Channel 01:
2.412 GHz
Channel 01:
2.412 GHz
Channel 01:
2.412 GHz
Channel 01:
2.412 GHz
Channel 01:
2.412 GHz
Channel 02:
2.417 GHz
Channel 02:
2.417 GHz
Channel 02:
2.417 GHz
Channel 02:
2.417 GHz
Channel 02:
2.417 GHz
Channel 02:
2.417 GHz
Channel 02:
2.417 GHz
Channel 02:
2.417 GHz
Channel 03:
2.422 GHz
Channel 03:
2.422 GHz
Channel 03:
2.422 GHz
Channel 03:
2.422 GHz
Channel 03:
2.422 GHz
Channel 03:
2.422 GHz
Channel 03:
2.422 GHz
Channel 03:
2.422 GHz
Channel 04:
2.427 GHz
Channel 04:
2.427 GHz
Channel 04:
2.427 GHz
Channel 04:
2.427 GHz
Channel
04: 2.427
GHz
Channel 04:
2.427 GHz
Channel 04:
2.427 GHz
Channel 04
: 2.427 GHz
Channel 05:
2.432 GHz
Channel 05:
2.432 GHz
Channel 05:
2.432 GHz
Channel 05:
2.432 GHz
Channel 05:
2.432 GHz
Channel 05:
2.432 GHz
Channel 05:
2.432 GHz
Channel 05:
2.432 GHz
Channel 06:
2.437 GHz
Channel 06:
2.437 GHz
Channel 06:
2.437 GHz
Channel 06:
2.437 GHz
Channel 06:
2.437 GHz
Channel 06:
2.437 GHz
Channel 06:
2.437 GHz
Channel 06:
2.437 GHz
Channel 07:
2.442 GHz
Channel 07:
2.442 GHz
Channel 07 :
2.442 GHz
Channel 07:
2.442 GHz
Channel 07:
2.442 GHz
Channel 07:
2.442 GHz
Channel 07:
2.442 GHz
Channel 07:
2.442 GHz
Channel 08:
2.447 GHz
Channel 08:
2.447 GHz
Channel 08:
2.447 GHz
Channel 08:
2.447 GHz
Channel 08:
2.447 GHz
Channel 08:
2.447 GHz
Channel 08:
2.447 GHz
Channel 08:
2.447 GHz
Channel 09:
2.452 GHz
Channel 09:
2.452 GHz
Channel 09:
2.452 GHz
Channel 09:
2.452 GHz
Channel 09:
2.452 GHz
Channel 09:
2.452 GHz
Channel 09:
2.452 GHz
Channel 09:
2.452 GHz
Channel 10:
2.457 GHz
Channel 10:
2.457 GHz
Channel 10:
2.457 GHz
Channel 10:
2.457 GHz
Channel 10:
2.457 GHz
Channel 10:
2.457 GHz
Channel 10:
2.457 GHz
Channel 10:
2.457 GHz
Channel 11:
2.462 GHz
Channel 11:
2.462 GHz
Channel 11:
2.462 GHz
Channel 11:
2.462 GHz
Channel 11:
2.462 GHz
Channel 11:
2.462 GHz
Channel 11:
2.462 GHz
Channel 11:
2.462 GHz
Channel 12:
2.467 GHz
Channel 12:
2.467 GHz
Channel 12:
2.467 GHz
Channel 12:
2.467 GHz
Channel 12:
2.467 GHz
Channel 12:
2.467 GHz
Channel 12:
2.467 GHz
Channel 13:
2.472 GHz
Channel 13:
2.472 GHz
Channel 13:
2.472 GHz
Channel 13:
2.472 GHz
Channel 13:
2.472 GHz
Channel 13:
2.472 GHz
Channel 13:
2.472 GHz
Channel 14:
2.484 GHz
Europe includes those countries adhering to ETSI standard EN 301 893 V1.5.1, the European Union's harmonized radio
standard for unlicensed devices.
28
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Configuring Communication
Configuring Wireless Network Access
The first step in connecting the MVP-9000i to a wireless network is to configure the wireless communication parameters
within the device’s System Settings page. This is done via the System Settings page, which allows configuration of the IP
Address, System Number and Username/Password information assigned to the target Master.
Step 1: Configure the Device’s WiFi Settings
The first step to a successful setup of the internal wireless card is to configure the WiFi tab on the System Settings page.
This section configures the communication parameters from the MVP panel to the web.
Wireless communication using a DHCP Address
In the Protected Setup page:
1. Touch the Network button to open the System Settings page.
2. Select the WiFi tab (FIG. 25).
FIG. 25 System Settings page - WiFi tab
3. Toggle the DHCP/Static field until the choice cycles to DHCP. This action causes all fields in the IP Settings
section, other than Host Name, to be greyed-out.
4. Press the optional Host Name field to open the Host Name keyboard (FIG. 26) and enter the host name information.
The default name is “localhost”.
FIG. 26 Host Name keyboard
5. Press OK after assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.
6. The remaining greyed-out fields in the IP Settings section cannot be altered. Once the panel is rebooted, these
values are obtained by the unit and displayed in the DNS fields after power-up.
This information can be found in either the Workspace - System name > Define
Device section of the code that defines the properties for the panel, or in the Device
Addressing/Network Addresses section of the Tools > NetLinx Diagnostics dialog.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
29
Configuring Communication
7. Set up the security and communication parameters between the wireless card and the target AP by configuring the
Wireless Settings section on this page. Refer to Step 2: Configure the Card’s Wireless Security Settings section on
page 32 for detailed procedures to setup either a secure or insecure connection.
Wireless Communication Using a Static IP Address
1. From the Protected Setup page, press the Network button to open the System Settings page. Wireless
communication is set within the WiFi tab of this page (FIG. 25).
Check with your System Administrator for a pre-reserved Static IP Address to be
assigned to the panel. This address must be obtained before continuing with the
Static assignment of the panel.
2. Toggle the DHCP/Static field until the choice cycles to Static. The IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway fields
then turn red, noting that they are now user-editable.
3. Press the IP Address field to open a keyboard and enter the Static IP Address provided by the System Administrator.
Press OK after entering the IP address information and repeat the same process for the Subnet Mask and Gateway
fields.
4. Press the optional Host Name field to open the keyboard and enter the Host Name information. Press OK after
assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.
5. Press the Primary DNS field to open a Keyboard, enter the Primary DNS Address (provided by the System
Administrator) and press OK when compete. Repeat this process for the Secondary DNS field.
6. Press the Domain field to open a Keyboard, enter the resolvable domain Address (this is provided by the System
Administrator and equates to a unique Internet name for the panel), and press OK when complete.
7. Set up the security and communication parameters between the wireless card and the target AP by configuring the
information on the second page of the WiFi tab. Refer to the following section for detailed procedures to set up
either a secure or unsecure connection.
Using the Wireless Site Survey Tool
This tool allows a user to “sniff out” all transmitting Wireless Access Points within the detection range of the internal
wireless card (FIG. 27). Once the Site Survey button is pressed, the device displays the Wireless Site Survey page, which
contains the following categories:
Network Name (SSID) - Wireless Access Point names
Channel (RF) - Channel currently being used by the AP (Access Point)
Security (if undetectable - N/A) - Security protocol enabled on the AP
Signal - Displays the signal strength
MAC Address - Unique identification of the transmitting Access Point
FIG. 27 Wireless Site Survey page
While running a site survey, wireless connectivity will be unavailable.
30
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Configuring Communication
To access the Wireless Site Survey page:
1. From the System Settings page, touch the WiFi tab.
2. At the bottom of the page, press the Next button to move to the second WiFi tab page.
3. Press the Site Survey button. This action launches the Wireless Site Survey page, which displays a listing of all
detected APs in the communication range of the internal card.
The card scans its environment every four seconds and adds any new APs found to the list. Every scan cycle
updates the signal strength fields.
Access points are tracked by MAC Address.
If the AP’s SSID is set as a blank, then N/A is displayed within the SSID field.
If the AP’s SSID is not broadcast, it will not show up on the Wireless Networks screen.
If an AP is displayed in the list is not detected for 10 scans in a row, it is then removed from the screen. In
this way, a user can walk around a building and track access points as they move in and out of range.
4. Sort the information provided on this page by pressing on a column name. This moves the sorting arrow to that
column, where it may be toggled up or down.
Up arrow - indicates that the information is being sorted in an ascending order.
Down arrow - indicates that the information is being sorted in a descending order.
If the panel detects more than 10 APs, the Up/Down arrows at the far right side of the
page become active (blue) and allow the user to scroll through the list of entries.
5. Select a desired Access Point by touching the corresponding row. The up arrow and down arrow will be grayed out
if ten or fewer access points are detected. If more are detected, then they will be enabled as appropriate so that the
user can scroll through the list.
6. With the desired AP selected and highlighted, click the Connect button to be directed to the selected security
mode’s popup window with the SSID field filled in. From there, either Cancel the operation or fill in any necessary
information fields and then click Save.
Selecting an Open, WEP, or WPA-PSK Access Point and then clicking Connect will open the corresponding
Simple Mode popup window (FIG. 28). For any other security mode, clicking Connect will open the Enterprise
Mode popup window (FIG. 29). Different EAP methods are selectable from the Security Type button.
FIG. 28 Wireless Security: Simple Mode popup window
FIG. 29 Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode popup window
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
31
Configuring Communication
Step 2: Configure the Card’s Wireless Security Settings
The second step in setting up the wireless card is to configure the Wireless Settings section of the WiFi Settings tab. This
section configures both the communication and security parameters from the internal wireless card to an access point
(AP). The procedures outlined within the following sections for an 802.11a/b/g card facilitate a common security
configuration to a target access point.
Refer to the Appendix B: Wireless Technology section on page 175 for more information on other security methods.
After setting up the wireless card parameters, configure the communication parameters for the target Master; see Step 3:
Choose a Master Connection Mode section on page 32.
Configuring the Device’s Wireless Card for Secured Access to a WPA-PSK-Secured AP
In the System Settings page:
1. Select the WiFi tab.
2. Press the Next button to move to the second WiFi tab page.
3. Enter the SSID information by:
Automatically filling it by pressing the Site Survey button. From the Site Survey page, choosing an AP from
within the Site Survey page and then pressing the Connect button at the bottom of the page (FIG. 27).
The selected AP should be preconfigured with an WPA-PSK password.
Manually entering the SSID information into the appropriate fields by following steps 7 through 9.
4. From the two Security Mode selections, press the Simple button to open the Wireless Security: Simple Mode popup
window. Press the Security Type field to select WPA-PSK.
5. Press the red SSID field to display an on-screen Network Name (SSID) keyboard.
6. In this keyboard, enter the SSID name of the access point (case sensitive).
7. Click OK when complete or Abort to return to the popup window without saving any changes.
8. Enter the pre-configured WPA-PSK password.
9. From the Wireless Security: Simple Mode popup window (FIG. 28), press the Save button to incorporate the new
information into the device and begin the communication process.
10. Verify the proper configuration in the fields in the WiFi tab. Refer to Step 1: Configure the Device’s WiFi
Settings section on page 29 for detailed information.
11. Press the Back button twice to return to the Status page. Remember that the connection must be configured to a
target Master from the System Settings page.
12. Monitor the WiFi Settings tab to verify that the IP address was obtained. This is confirmation of a successful
connection to the AP.
The signal level field should provide some value indicating the strength of the signal
from the Access Point. If no signal or no IP Address is displayed, configuration of the
network may be required.
Step 3: Choose a Master Connection Mode
The MVP-9000i requires a decision on the type of connection to be made between it and the Master.
To establish a Master connection:
1. From the System Settings page, select the Master tab if it is not already selected.
2. The Current Connection field displays the current connection availability (FIG. 30). If this field reads “Any”, then
connections may be made via Ethernet, wireless Ethernet, or USB.
A Wired connection involves communication from the panel to a Master via a wired Ethernet connection to
the network. This is available through the Wired tab on the System Settings page.
A WiFi connection involves communication from the panel to a Master via a wireless connection to the
network. This is available through the WiFi tab on the System Settings page.
32
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Configuring Communication
FIG. 30 System Settings page - Master Tab
A USB connection is a direct connection from the panel’s mini-USB port to a corresponding USB port on the
PC (acting as a Virtual Master). This is available through the USB tab on the System Settings page.
3. Select the Mode field to choose the master connection mode. The connection modes are Auto, URL, and Listen. For
more information on the Connection Modes, please refer to the System Settings - Master section on page 64.
Although firmware upgrades can be conducted over a wireless Ethernet connection,
transferring firmware KIT files over a wired LAN, USB data stick, or USB flash card is
recommended, and only when the panel is connected to a power supply. If battery
power is below 30 percent, and the touch panel is not connected to a power supply,
the download will not be completed.
Ethernet Over USB
The MVP-9000i device supports an Ethernet over USB driver for panel downloads and firmware updates. This means
that the device can connect to a host computer for updates through its Mini USB port instead of through a standard
Ethernet port (FIG. 31).
Mini USB port
FIG. 31 USB Port on the MVP-9000i
Firmware downloads require use of the USB Programming Cable (FG10-5965) and a computer running Windows XP.
Touch Panel Setup
To prepare the MVP-9000i for Ethernet for USB communication:
1. Turn on the MVP-9000i and wait for the device to finish booting up.
2. Insert the mini-USB end of the USB Programming Cable into the mini-USB port on the device. Insert the other end
into the appropriate USB port on the computer containing the files to be downloaded.
3. When the connection is made, the Windows XP machine will detect the device as an unsupported USB device. It
then presents a dialog that prompts the user for a suitable driver (FIG. 32):
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
33
Configuring Communication
FIG. 32 Found New Hardware Wizard dialog
4. Select Yes, this time only and click on Next.
5. In the new window:
- Select Use the following IP Address.
Under IP address, provide an IP address. The USB interface IP address of the panel can be found in the
System Settings page under the USB tab. The default USB IP of panel is 172.16.0.2, so the IP address for the
USB interface on the PC must be 172.16.0.xx. Ensure that it is in the same subnet as the IP address given to
the usb0 interface on the MVP-9000i, but make sure that it has a different node number. The IP address
cannot be the same as the panel`s USB IP address.
Under Subnet mask, set the suitable subnet mask. Make sure that the host machine has the same subnet mask.
(The subnet mask for USB connection is 255.255.0.0, which is not user-configurable.)
Click OK.
6. In the next box (FIG. 33), make sure to:
Select Search for the best driver in these locations
Select Include this location in the search
Click on Browse
Select the folder that contains the 'linux.inf' file
FIG. 33 Found New Hardware Wizard Installation Options dialog
7. Click on Next.
8. The Windows XP machine now searches for the suitable driver (FIG. 34).
FIG. 34 Found New Hardware Wizard while searching for the driver
9. Once the system finds the driver, it displays its choice (FIG. 35). Click Finish to complete the driver installation.
34
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Configuring Communication
FIG. 35 Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard
When an IP address is assigned to the usb0 interface on the device, Windows XP will make an attempt to assign an IP
address to the corresponding interface on the Windows side. Usually, this IP address is a random value and in a totally
different subnet. The user may set the Windows network properties for the Ethernet over USB interface to have a specific
address whenever the Windows XP system detects an MVP-9000i with an assigned IP address.
In Windows XP:
1. From the Windows XP desktop, click on Start > Settings > Network Connections. This opens a window listing
the currently active network connections.
2. Select the connection that is specific to AMX USB Device Link.
3. Right click and select Properties.
4. In the Local Area Connection 3 Properties window (FIG. 36) under the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/
IP) and click on Properties.
FIG. 36 Local Area Connection 3 Properties
5. In the new window:
Select Use the following IP Address.
Under IP address, provide an IP address (ensure that it is in the same subnet as the IP address given to the
usb0 interface on the MVP-9000i).
Under Subnet mask, set the suitable subnet mask. Make sure that the host machine has the same subnet mask.
(The subnet mask for USB connection is 255.255.0.0, which is not user-configurable.)
Click on OK'
6. In the Local Area Connection 3 Properties window, click on OK.
The user should now be able to run any TCP/IP application between the two systems.
Configure a Virtual NetLinx Master using NetLinx Studio
A Virtual NetLinx Master (VNM) is used when the target panel is not actually connected to a physical NetLinx Master.
In this situation, the PC takes on the functions of a Master via a Virtual NetLinx Master. This connection is made by
either using the PC’s Ethernet Address (via TCP/IP using a known PC’s IP Address as the Master) or using a direct miniUSB connection to communicate directly to the panel.
Before beginning:
1. If using the mini-USB connection, verify the panel has been configured to communicate via USB within the System
Settings page and that the USB driver has been properly configured. Changing the Master Connection type requires
a reboot before the change takes effect.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
35
Configuring Communication
2. In NetLinx Studio, select Settings > Master Communication Settings, from the Main menu to open the Master
Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 37).
FIG. 37 Master Communications Settings dialog
3. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog (FIG. 38).
FIG. 38 Communications Settings dialog
4. Click the NetLinx Master radio button in the Platform Selection section.
5. Click the Virtual NetLinx Master radio button in the Transport Connection Option section.
6. Click the Edit Settings button to open the Virtual NetLinx Master Settings dialog (FIG. 39).
FIG. 39 Virtual NetLinx Master Settings dialog
7. Enter the System number; the default is 1.
8. Click OK on all open dialogs to save your settings.
9. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System.
10. Right-click on Empty Device Tree/System and select Refresh System to re-populate the list.
The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number (in the Online Tree tab) until both the
system number (default = 1) is entered into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page and the
panel is restarted.
The System Connection status button turns green after a few seconds to indicate an active USB connection to
the PC via the Virtual Master.
If the System Connection icon does not turn green, check the USB connection and communication settings
and refresh the system.
36
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Configuring Communication
Ethernet
1. When using Wireless Ethernet, press the listed Mode in the Master tab to toggle through the available connection
modes:
Connection Modes
Mode Description
Procedures
None
No connection
None
Auto
The device connects to the first master that
responds. This setting requires setting the
System Number.
Setting the System Number:
The device connects to the specific IP of a
Master via a TCP connection. This setting
requires setting the Master’s IP.
Setting the Master IP:
The device "listens" for the Master to initiate
contact. This setting requires providing the
Master with the device’s IP.
Confirm that the device IP is on the Master URL
list. Set the Host Name on the device and use it to
locate the device on the Master. Host Name is
particularly useful in the DHCP scenario, where
the IP address can change.
URL
Listen
1. Select the System Number to open the keypad.
2. Set your System Number and select Done.
1. Select the Master IP number to the keyboard.
2. Set the Master IP and select Done.
2. Select the Master Port Num. field to open the keypad and change this value.
The default setting for the port is 1319.
3. Set the Master Port and select OK.
4. If you enabled password security on your Master, set the username and password within the device.
5. Select the blank field Username to open the keyboard.
6. Set the Username and select OK.
7. Select the blank field Password to open the keyboard.
8. Set the Password and select OK.
9. Press the Back button twice to return to the Status page.
Master Connection to a Virtual Master via Ethernet
When configuring the panel to communicate with a Virtual Master on your PC via
wireless Ethernet, the Master IP/URL field must be configured to match the IP
Address of the PC. Make sure to use the Virtual System value assigned to the Virtual
Master within NetLinx Studio.
Before beginning:
1. Verify that the panel has been configured to communicate with the Wireless Access Point and confirm that the
signal strength quality bargraph is On.
2. In NetLinx Studio, select Settings > Master Communication Settings from the Main menu to open the Master
Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 40).
FIG. 40 Master Communications Settings dialog
3. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog (FIG. 41).
4. Click on the Virtual NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section) to indicate that you are
working as a NetLinx Master.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
37
Configuring Communication
FIG. 41 Communications Settings dialog
5. Click on the Virtual NetLinx Master radio box from the Transport Connection Option section to indicate wanting
to configure the PC to communicate with a panel. Everything else, such as the Authentication, is greyed out because
the procedure is not being made through the Master’s UI.
6. Click the Edit Settings button in the Communications Settings dialog to open the Virtual NetLinx Master Settings
dialog (FIG. 42).
IP Addresses of computer
(also obtained by using the
Start > Run > cmd command
FIG. 42 Virtual NetLinx Master Settings dialog
7. From within this dialog, enter the System number (default is 1) and note the IP Address of the target PC being used
as the Virtual Master. This IP Address can also be obtained by following these procedures:
On the PC, click Start > Run to open the Run dialog.
Enter cmd into the Open field and click OK to open the command DOS prompt.
From the C:\> command line, enter ipconfig to display the IP Address of the PC. This information is entered
into the Master IP/URL field on the panel.
8. Click OK to close the open dialogs, save the settings, and return to the main NetLinx Studio application.
9. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System. The default System
value is one.
10. Right-click on the Empty Device Tree/System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate the list.
11. Place the panel in the Table Docking Station or in the Wall Docking Station and turn the panel On.
12. After the panel powers up, press and hold down the Reset button for 6 seconds to continue with the setup process
and proceed to the Setup page.
13. Select Protected Setup > Network to open the System Settings page and Master tab (FIG. 43).
The System number is assigned
to the Master within the AMX
software application (these
MUST match)
When using a Virtual Master,
there is no need to enter a
username and/or password.
Enter the IP Address
information of the PC
used as a Virtual Master.
FIG. 43 Sample System Settings page (for Virtual Master communication)
38
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Configuring Communication
14. Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL.
By selecting URL, the System Number field becomes read-only (grey) because the panel pulls this value directly
from the communicating target Master, virtual or not. A Virtual Master system value can be set within the active
AMX software applications such as NetLinx Studio, TPD4, or IREdit.
15. Press the Master IP/URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the IP Address of the PC used as the Virtual Master.
16. Click OK to accept the new value and return to the System Settings page.
17. Do not alter the Master Port Number value, as this is the default value used by NetLinx.
18. Press the Back button twice to open the Status page and save your changes.
Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel
The G4 Web Control feature allows you to use a PC to interact with a G4-enabled panel via the Web. This feature works
in tandem with the browser-capable NetLinx Security firmware update (build 300 or higher). Refer to the G4 Web
Control Settings Page section on page 83 for more detailed field information.
G4 Web Control cannot display page transitions or Dynamo images that are
accelerated in hardware.
Verify your NetLinx Master (ME260/64 or NI-Series) has been installed with the latest
firmware KIT file from www.amx.com. Refer to the NetLinx Master instruction
manual for more detailed information on the use of the new Web-based NetLinx
Security.
1. From the Setup page, press the Protected button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the Protected
Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.
2. Press the G4 WebControl button to open the G4 Web Control Settings page (FIG. 44).
FIG. 44 G4 Web Control Settings page
3. Press the G4 Web Control button until it toggles to On and turns green.
4. The Control Name field is exactly the same as the Device Name field in the Protected Setup page.
5. Press the Control Password field to open the Web Password keyboard.
6. From the Web Password keyboard, enter a unique alpha-numeric string to be assigned as the G4 Authentication
session password associated with VNC web access of this panel.
7. Press OK to save all changes and return to the G4 Web Control Settings page or Abort to return to the page without
saving any changes.
8. Press the Control Port field to open the Web Port Number keypad.
9. Within the keypad, enter a unique numeric value to be assigned to the port on which the VNC Web Server is
running. The default value is 5900. Press OK after entering the value.
10. Press the Up/Down arrows in the Timeout section to increase or decrease the amount of time the device can remain
idle with no cursor movements before the session is closed and the user is disconnected. The options are Off; 3, 5,
10, 15, and 30 minutes; and 1, 2, 3, and 4 hours.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
39
Configuring Communication
11. Press the Back button twice to return to the Status page and save any changes.
Verify that the NetLinx Master’s IP Address and System Number have been properly
entered into the Master tab of the System Settings page.
Using the NetLinx Master To Control the G4 Panel
Refer to the particular NetLinx Master’s instruction manual for detailed information on how to download the latest
firmware from www.amx.com. This firmware build enables SSL certificate identification and encryption, HTTPS
communication, ICSP data encryption, and disables the ability to alter the Master security properties via a TELNET
session.
In order to make full use of the SSL encryption, the web browser used should incorporate an
encryption feature. This encryption level is displayed as a Cipher strength.
Once the Master’s IP Address has been set through NetLinx Studio version 2.x or higher:
1. Launch your web browser.
2. Enter the IP Address of the target Master (example: http://198.198.99.99) into the web browser’s Address field.
3. Press the Enter key on your keyboard to begin the communication process between the target Master and your
computer.
Initially, the Master Security option is disabled from within the System Security page, and no username and
password is required for access or configuration.
Both HTTP and HTTPS Ports are enabled by default via the Manage System > Server page.
If the Master has been previously configured for secured communication, click OK to accept the AMX SSL
certificate, if SSL is enabled, and then enter a valid username and password into the fields within the Login
dialog.
4. Click OK to enter the information and proceed to the Master’s Manage WebControl Connections window. This
page (FIG. 45) is accessed by clicking on the Manage connections link (within the Web Control section within the
Navigation frame). Once activated, this page displays links to G4 panels running the latest G4 Web Control feature
that were previously set up and activated on the device.
Compatible
devices field
(showing G4
WebControl links)
G4 panels
Compression
Options
FIG. 45 Manage WebControl Connections page (populated with compatible panels)
40
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Configuring Communication
5. Click on the G4 panel name link associated with the target panel. A secondary web browser window appears on the
screen (FIG. 46).
FIG. 46 Web Control VNC installation and Password entry screens
6. Click Yes from the Security Alert popup window to agree to the installation of the G4 WebControl application on
your computer. This application contains the necessary Active X and VNC client applications necessary to properly
view and control the panel pages from your computer.
The G4 Web Control application is sent by the panel to the computer that is used for
communication. Once the application is installed, this popup will no longer appear.
This popup will only appear if you are connecting to the target panel using a different
computer.
7. Some situations might display a Connection Details dialog (FIG. 47) requesting a VNC Server IP Address. This is
the IP Address not of the Master but of the target touch panel. Depending on which method of communication is
being used, it can be found in either:
Wired Ethernet - System Settings > IP Settings section within the IP Address field.
Wireless - Wireless Settings > IP Settings section within the IP Address field.
If this field does not appear, continue to step 9.
IP Address of touch panel
- obtained from WiFi tab of
the System Settings page
(MVP-9000i)
FIG. 47 Connection Details dialog
8. If a WebControl password was set up on the G4 WebControl page, a G4 Authentication Session password dialog box
appears on the screen within the secondary browser window.
9. Enter the Web Control session password into the Session Password field (FIG. 47).
This password was previously entered into the Control Password field within the G4 Web Control Settings page on
the panel.
10. Click OK to send the password to the panel and begin the session.
A confirmation message appears stating "Please wait, Initial screen loading.".
The secondary window is then populated with the same G4 page being displayed on the target G4 panel.
A small circle appears within the on-screen G4 panel page and corresponds to the location of the mouse
cursor.
A left-mouse click on the computer-displayed panel page equates to an actual touch on the target G4 panel
page.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
41
Configuring Communication
42
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Setup Pages
Setup Pages
Overview
The MVP-9000i features on-board Setup pages. Use the options in the Setup pages to access panel information and make
various configuration changes.
Accessing the Setup pages
To access the Setup pages, hold the bottom left capacitive touch button and the bottom of the directional pad (FIG. 1) for
3 seconds. Release the buttons as soon as the green popup window appears. Alternately, press the Reset button on the left
side of the MVP-9000i with the stylus for 6 seconds (FIG. 48).
Stylus
Reset button
FIG. 48 Setup Page Access on the MVP-9000i
The Reset button allows access to three different modes. Pressing and holding for 6 seconds opens the Setup page.
Continuing to hold for a total of 9 seconds opens the Calibrate page (page 82). Holding the Reset button for 12 seconds
will put the device into Shutdown Mode.
Landscape and Portrait Mode Setup Pages
If desired, the MVP-9000i may be switched between landscape and portrait orientation modes via the System & Panel
Options page in the Protected Setup pages (page 60). Separate TPDesign4 files must be downloaded for each mode.
These files are available at www.amx.com.
To switch between Landscape and Portrait Mode, please refer to the System & Panel Options page on page 60.
Setup Page
The Setup page (FIG. 49) allows quick access to several essential panel properties:
FIG. 49 MVP-9000i Setup page
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
43
Setup Pages
Features on this page include:
Setup Page
Back icon:
The icon in the upper-left corner of each Setup page allows the user to return to
the previously selected page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image of
three networked computers).
Connection Status icon: The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page provides a constant visual
indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Navigation Buttons:
The buttons along on the left half of the page provide access to secondary Setup
pages (see following sections).
Connection Status:
Displays whether the panel is has external communication, as well as the
encryption status of the Master, the connection type (Ethernet or USB), and to
which System the panel is connected.
• The Connection Status field always displays the device number. If the device
has not been established on a network, the device number will read “0”.
• Until a connection is established, the message displayed is: “Attempting
connection.”.
• When a connection is established, the message displayed is either: “Connected
via Ethernet “or “Connected via USB “.
• The word “Encrypted” appears when an encrypted connection is established
with a NetLinx Master.
Reboot button:
Press this button to reboot the panel.
Shutdown button:
Press this button to shut off the panel. If the panel is docked in a docking station or
otherwise connected to external power, this button will be greyed out.
To shut down the panel:
1. Access the Setup page.
2. Press the Shutdown button.
3. Disconnect any power source plugs or USB connections, if necessary.
Navigation Buttons
The following Navigation buttons (FIG. 50) appear on the left side of the Setup page:
FIG. 50 Navigation buttons on the Status page
The six buttons include:
Display: this button opens the Display page (page 45)
Audio: this button opens the Audio page (page 46)
Battery: this button opens the Power Management page (page 47)
Time: this button opens the Date/Time page (page 52)
Panel Info: this button opens the Panel Information page (page 54)
Protected: this button opens the Protected Setup page (page 59)
44
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Setup Pages
Display Page
The Display page controls the basic functions of the touch panel display, including the panel brightness.
FIG. 51 Display page
The features on this page include:
Display Page
Back icon:
The icon in the upper-left corner of each Setup page allows the user to return to
the previously selected page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image of
three networked computers).
Connection Status icon: The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page provides a constant visual
indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Panel Brightness:
Sets the display brightness and contrast levels of the panel.
• Press the Brightness Up/Down buttons to adjust the brightness level.
Range = 0 - 100.
Note: Be careful not to turn down the brightness too low to be able to see the
Setup page.
Inactivity Page:
Indicates the length of time that the panel can remain idle before automatically
flipping to a pre-selected page.
• Press the Up/Down buttons to increase/decrease the Inactivity Page Flip
Timeout setting. Range = 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 3, 4 hours.
• Set the timeout value to 0 to disable Inactivity Page mode.
Note: The touch panel page used for the Inactivity page flip is named within a
small Inactivity Page field below the buttons. The default reading is “MAIN”.
Flyout Menu:
This switch controls the flyout menus on the capacitive touch buttons on the left of
the screen. “On” allows use of any flyout menus connected to the buttons, and
“OFF” disables them.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
45
Setup Pages
Audio Page
The Audio page allows adjustment of volume levels and panel sounds settings (FIG. 52).
FIG. 52 Audio pages
Features on this page include:
Audio Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image of
three networked computers).
Connection Status
icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page provides a constant visual
indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Button Sounds:
• Activating the Hit On button plays a default sound when you touch an active
button. Touch the field a second time to switch the button to Hit Off, which
disables the sound.
• Activating Miss On button plays a default sound when you touch a non-active
button or any area outside of the active button. Touch the field a second time to
switch the button to Miss Off, which disables the sound.
• The Test button plays a test WAV/MP3 file over the panel’s internal speakers.
Intercom
Mic Level:
Adjusts the volume level on the intercom’s microphone:
• Use the Up/Down buttons to adjust the microphone level (range = 0 - 100%).
Press the Mute On button to mute the microphone and press it again (switching
the button to Mute Off) to enable it.
Volume:
Adjusts the volume level on the touch panel’s speaker:
• Use the Up/Down buttons to adjust the speaker level (range = 0 - 100%). Press
the Mute On button to mute the speaker and press it again (switching the button
to Mute Off) to enable it.
Master Volume:
This section allows you to alter the current master volume level:
• Use the Up/Down buttons to adjust the volume level in one-percent increments
(range = 0 - 100%).
• The Master Volume readout indicates the current volume level. Press the Up/
Down buttons to adjust the volume level in one-percent increments (range = 0 100%).
• The Mute On button toggles the Mute feature. Press it again to switch it to Mute
Off.
46
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Setup Pages
WAV files - Supported Sample Rates
The following sample rates for WAV files are supported by MVP-9000i panels:
Supported WAV Sample Rates
• 48000 Hz
• 16000 Hz
• 44100 Hz
• 12000 Hz
• 32000 Hz
• 11025 Hz
• 24000 Hz
• 8000 Hz
• 22050 Hz
Power Management Page
The options on the Power Management page allow setting of power warning preferences and battery status information,
and adjustment of the display times for battery warnings (FIG. 53)
FIG. 53 Power Management page
Features on this page include:
Power Management Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page provides a constant
visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Power Settings:
Sleep:
The three settings in the Power Settings section may be selected by touching
either the arrow to the left of each setting or by touching the entry itself. Each is
highlighted with a green arrow to the left when selected.
This value determines the number of seconds or minutes that need to pass
before the panel automatically goes into Sleep Mode. Once asleep, the device
may be awakened by touching the buttons on either side of the screen or the
screen itself. Use the Up/Down arrows to change the settings; the
setting bar will change from blue to green to display the percentage of minimum
versus maximum.
Range = 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds; 5, 15, 30 minutes; 1, 2 hours Default = 2
hours
Standby:
This value determines the number of seconds or minutes that need to pass
before the panel automatically goes into Standby Mode. Once in standby, the
device may be awakened by touching the screen. Use the Up/Down arrows to
change the settings; the setting bar will change from blue to yellow to display
the percentage of minimum versus maximum. A value of Off disables this
feature.
Range = 15, 30 minutes; 1, 2, 3, 4 hours Default = Off
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
47
Setup Pages
Power Management Page (Cont.)
Shutdown:
This value determines the number of seconds or minutes that need to pass
before the panel automatically shuts down. Once shut down, the device will
have to be restarted. The Up/Down buttons alter the timeout value (in minutes).
Use the Up/Down arrows to change the settings; the setting bar will change
from blue to orange to display the percentage of minimum versus maximum. A
value of Off disables this feature.
Note: Shutdown mode turns the unit completely off, including communication
circuits, and preserves battery life, unlike Sleep or Standby mode, which only
turn off the display. From Shutdown mode, a unit may be turned on by touching
the screen or applying power.
Range = 3, 5, 10, 15, 30 minutes; 1, 2, 3, 4 hours Default = Off.
Charge Status:
The Charge Status field indicates the power charge currently available on the
battery. When fully charged, the field is green and reads “Charged”.
Battery Type:
The Battery Type field indicates the type of battery currently installed in the
MVP-9000i. The value listed is 1.
Docking Station Version:
The Docking Station Version field indicates the version of firmware used for
the currently used Table or Wall Docking Station. This field is blank if the panel
is not docked in a Docking Station.
Dock Status:
The Dock Status icon turns green when connected to an active Table or Wall
Docking Station, and turns red when disconnected.
NOTE: when using the panel’s included power source, this icon will still appear
red, even if the panel is drawing power from the power source.
Battery Conditioning:
• Press the Test button to verify that the battery has no faults.
• Press the Auto button to open the Battery Auto Conditioning popup window
(FIG. 55).
Battery Life:
The Battery Life button has three settings, which control how the battery will be
conditioned to maximize functionality:
• Auto: The conditioning will give a balance of a maximum battery run time and
a maximum battery life time.
• Max Runtime: The conditioning will favor the maximum possible run time
between chargings.
• Max Lifetime: The conditioning will favor the maximum possible battery
lifetime.
Auto Dim:
The DISABLE/DISABLED button acts as a power save feature with two options:
• On - Clicking on this button activates the brightness limit set on the panel,
conserving battery power. Activating this feature causes the panel to function
at 10% of full brightness and overrides the Panel Brightness value set on the
Setup page.
• Off - Clicking on this button deactivates this power save feature. The panel
will use the Panel Brightness level.
When enabled, Auto Dim will engage at half the time set under the Sleep
setting or after five minutes, whichever is sooner.
Battery Conditioning
From the Power Management page, you can control conditioning of the battery to maximize run time between chargings
or maximize the battery’s total lifespan before replacement is necessary. To test the battery in preparation for
conditioning, press the Test button on the Power Management page.If any fault exists in the battery, a confirmation
dialog box appears (FIG. 54) that warns of the fault. For more information on the fault, please contact AMX Customer
Support, and give the fault code from the confirmation dialog.
The Battery Life button (FIG. 53) has three settings that determine the battery’s conditioning for maximum performance
over the battery’s operational lifetime. The three settings include:
Auto: The battery conditioning cycle gives a balance between maximizing the battery’s maximum runtime
between chargings and its maximum possible operational life based on usage.
Max Runtime: The battery conditioning cycle favors the maximum run time available on the battery between
chargings. Favoring the maximum battery run time may affect the battery’s total operational lifetime before it
needs to be replaced.
48
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Setup Pages
FIG. 54 Battery Conditioning Confirmation Dialog
Max Lifetime: The battery conditioning cycle favors the maximum total operational lifetime of the battery.
Favoring the maximum battery lifetime may affect the battery’s maximum run time between chargings.
For more information on the MVP-9000i’s battery lifetime and battery replacement procedures, please refer to the
Battery Life and Replacement section on page 163.
Automatic Battery Conditioning
If the device is installed in an MVP-TDS-9 Table Docking Station or an MVP-WDS-9 Wall Docking Station (for more
information, please refer to the Table Docking Station on page 11 or the Wall Docking Station section on page 14), the
Docking Station will automatically conduct battery conditioning so long as the device remains within the Docking
Station, If the device is connected to a Table Docking Station or to an external power source, you should schedule a
regular battery conditioning through the Auto button (FIG. 53). To set the Auto Conditioning cycle:
1. Press the Auto button on the Power Management page to open the Battery Auto Conditioning popup window
(FIG. 55).
FIG. 55 Battery Auto Conditioning popup window
2. Click the Enabled slide to enable automatic battery conditioning.
3. Select the day of the week and the time at which the conditioning should start. For best results, schedule a time
when the MVP-9000i will not be in active use.
4. Press Exit to close the popup window and save your changes.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
49
Setup Pages
Testing the Battery
The Test button on the Power Management page allows you to verify that the MVP-9000i’s battery is functioning
properly and does not require reconditioning. If the battery requires reconditioning, the Test function will walk you
through the procedures necessary to start it.
The MVP-9000i must be docked in a Table or Wall Docking Station to use the Test
function.
To use the Test function:
1. Dock the MVP-9000i in a Table or Wall Docking Station prior to testing the battery.
2. Press the Test button.
3. If the battery does not require conditioning, a popup opens that reads "The battery is functioning normally and does
not currently need maintenance. Do you wish to run a maintenance cycle anyway?" (FIG. 56). Press No to close the
popup and return to the Power Management page, and Yes to start the reconditioning process.
FIG. 56 Normal battery function popup window
4. Pressing the Test button while the MVP-9000i is conducting its battery reconditioning process will open a popup
window reading "Battery maintenance is currently in progress. Do you wish to cancel the maintenance cycle?"
(FIG. 57). Press No to continue the battery reconditioning and close the popup window, and press Yes to stop the
reconditioning process, close the popup window, and return to the Power Management page.
FIG. 57 Battery maintenance in progress popup window
50
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Setup Pages
5. Pressing the Test button and the battery needs reconditioning opens a popup window reading "The battery is in need
of 1 maintenance cycle. One cycle takes 12-16 hours. Do you wish to proceed with a maintenance cycle right now?"
(FIG. 58). Press No to close the popup window without starting battery reconditioning. Press Yes to start the
reconditioning process and close the popup window.
FIG. 58 Battery In Need of Maintenance Cycle popup window
The reconditioning process has a charging and a discharging portion. During the charging portioning of the process, the
Display Timeout will operate per the timings set under the Power Settings section (page 47).However, during the
discharge portion of the reconditioning process, the display is turned on so the battery will discharge as fast as possible.
The Display Brightness should set to 90% or higher so the battery will discharge as fast as possible.
6. If you undock the MVP-9000i from its Docking Station while the panel is in the reconditioning process, a popup
window appears reading "Battery maintenance is paused." (page 51). This popup window will close when the touch
panel is redocked within the Docking Station.
FIG. 59 Battery Maintenance Is Paused popup window
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
51
Setup Pages
Date/Time Page
The options on the Date/Time page (FIG. 60) allows setting and adjusting of time and date information on the MVP9000i. If the time and/or date on the Master is modified, all connected devices will be updated to reflect the new
information.
FIG. 60 Date/Time page
Features on this page include:
Date/Time Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image of
three networked computers).
Connection Status icon: The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page provides a constant visual
indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Current Date/Time:
These fields display the calendar date information in several different formats.
Get Time:
The Get Time button retrieves Time and Date information from the Master.
Set Time:
The Set Time button retains and saves any time/date modifications made on the
panel.
The current date and time may be retrieved from the NetLinx Master, or it may be updated manually. To retrieve the date
and time from the Master:
1. From the Date/Time page, press the Get Time button.
2. The new time and date will be added.
3. Press the Back button to save the changes.
If the panel is not connected to a Master, the Get Time function will not work.
To set the date and time manually on an MVP-9000i:
1. From the Date/Time page, press the Set Time button to open the Set Date/Time popup window (FIG. 61).
2. Touch the field to be changed to highlight it.
3. Use the Up/Down arrows to change the information in the field.
4. To return to the Date/Time page without saving any changes, press Cancel.
5. To save all changes and return to the Date/Time page, press Save.
52
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Setup Pages
FIG. 61 Set Date/Time popup window
Set Date/Time Popup Window
Set Date/Time:
Use the Up/Down arrow buttons to adjust the MVP-9000i’s calendar date and time.
A white outline around the field indicates which field is currently selected.
• Year range = 2000 - 2199
• Month range = 1 - 12
• Day range = 1 - 31
• Hour = 24-hour military
• Minute range = 0 - 59
• Second range = 0 - 59
Cancel:
Touch this button to return to the Date/Time page without saving any changes.
Save:
Touch this button to save all changes and return to the Date/Time page.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
53
Setup Pages
Panel Information Page
The Panel Information page includes four tabs: Info (page 54), Config (page 55), File (page 56), and Project (page 57).
Panel Information Page - Info
The Info tab of the Panel Information page provides detailed panel information (FIG. 62).
FIG. 62 Panel Information page - Info
Features on this page include:
Panel Information Page - Info
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page provides a constant
visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
54
Panel Type:
Displays the model of the panel being used.
Firmware Version:
Displays the version number of the G4 firmware loaded on the panel.
Serial Number:
Displays the specific serial number value assigned to the panel.
Setup Pages:
Displays the type and version of the Setup pages being used by the panel.
Panel Start Time:
Displays the time taken by the panel to wake up from sleep mode.
Screen Width:
Displays the screen width (in pixels). MVP-9000i = 800 pixels.
Screen Height:
Displays the screen height (in pixels). MVP-9000i = 480 pixels.
File System:
Displays the amount of Compact Flash memory available on the panel.
RAM:
Displays the available RAM (or Extended Memory module) on the panel.
Bulb Hours:
Displays the number of hours elapsed with the display.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Setup Pages
Panel Information Page - Config
The Config tab provides information on the panel’s configuration (FIG. 63).
FIG. 63 Panel Information Page - Config
Features on this page include:
Panel Information Page - Config
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page provides a constant
visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Start Up String:
Displays the start-up string.
Wake Up String:
Displays the wake up string used after an activation from a timeout.
Sleep String:
Displays the sleep string used during a panel’s Sleep mode.
Standby String:
Displays the standby string used during a panel’s Standby mode.
Shutdown String:
Displays the shutdown string used during a panel’s Shutdown mode.
High Port:
Displays the high port (port count) value for the panel.
High Address:
Displays the high address (address count) value for the panel.
High Channel:
Displays the high channel (channel count) value for the panel.
High Level:
Displays the high level (level count) value being used by the panel.
Cradle Channel:
Displays the cradle channel (channel count) value being used by the panel.
Cradle Port:
Displays the cradle port (port count) value for the panel.
Battery Level:
Displays the battery level (level count) value for the panel.
Battery Port:
Displays the battery port (port count) value for the panel.
Power Up Page:
Displays the page assigned to display after the panel is powered-up.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
55
Setup Pages
Panel Information Page - File
The File tab displays information on the particular TPDesign4 file used by the panel.
FIG. 64 Panel Information page - File
Features on this page include:
Panel Information Page - File
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page provides a constant
visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
56
File Name:
The name of the TPDesign4 file currently being used for the panel.
File Revision:
The revision number of the TPDesign4 file, if applicable.
Last Save:
The last save date on the project.
Creation Date:
The creation date of the project.
Revision Date:
Displays the last revision date for the project.
Build Number
Displays the build number information of the TPD4 software used to create the
project file.
Blink Rate:
Displays the feedback blink rate, in 5-second increments.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Setup Pages
Panel Information Page - Project
The Project tab displays the project properties of the TPDesign4 project file currently loaded on the panel (FIG. 65).
FIG. 65 Panel Information page - Project
Features on this page include:
Panel Information Page - Project
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image of
three networked computers).
Connection Status icon: The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page provides a constant visual
indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Designer ID:
Displays the designer information.
Dealer ID:
Displays the dealer ID number (unique to every dealer and entered in TPD4).
Job Name:
Displays the job name.
Sales Order:
Displays the sales order information.
Purchase Order:
Displays the purchase order information.
Job Comments:
Displays any comments associated to the job (from the TPD4 project file).
File Name:
Displays the name of the TPDesign4 project file downloaded to the panel.
AMX IR Ports:
Displays the AMX 38 kHz and 455 kHz IR channel port used by the IR Emitter on
the panel.
• This information is specified in TPD4 (Project Properties > IR Emitters &
Receivers tab).
• For example, if you set the AMX IR 38K Port to 7 and then put a button on the
panel with a channel code of 5 and a port of 7, it will trigger the IR code in slot 5
of the AMX IR 38K Port.
User IR Ports:
Displays the primary channel ports used by the IR receiver on the panel. This field
may display up to eight ports being used at one time.
IR receivers and transmitters on G4 panels share the device address number of the
panel.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
57
Setup Pages
58
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
Protected Setup Pages
The Protected Setup page (FIG. 66) provides secured access to advanced panel configuration options, including
communication and security settings. The Protected Setup page is accessed through the Setup page (please refer to the
Setup Pages on page 43).
FIG. 66 Protected Setup page showing default values
To access the Protected Setup pages:
1. From the Setup page, select the Protected button on the left side of the screen. This opens the password keypad
(FIG. 67).
2. Enter the factory default password (1988) into the password keypad to access the page.
FIG. 67 Protected Settings page password keypad
This password may be changed later through the Passwords on page 84.
Features on the Protected Setup page include:
Protected Setup Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Navigation Buttons:
The buttons along on the left side of the page provide access to secondary
Protected Setup pages (see following sections).
Device Number:
Opens a keypad used to view or change the device number of the panel.
Device Name
Opens a keypad used to view or change the device name used for the panel.
Options:
Opens the System & Panel Options page (page 60).
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
59
Protected Setup Pages
The nine buttons include:
Network: this button opens the System Settings page (page 64)
Calibration: this button opens the Calibrate page (page 82)
G4 Web Control: this button opens the G4 Web Control Settings page (page 83)
Passwords: this button opens the Passwords page (page 87)
Logs: this button opens the Panel Logs page (page 86)
Cache: this button opens the Cache Settings page (page 86)
Statistics: this button opens the Panel Statistics page (page 88)
Connection Test: this button opens the Connection Utility page (page 90)
SIP: this button opens the SIP Settings page (page 91)
System & Panel Options page
Touch the Options button at the bottom of the Protected Setup page to open the System & Panel Options page (FIG. 68).
FIG. 68 Protected Setup Navigation Buttons
Features on the System & Panel Options page include:
System & Panel Options Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Panel Options:
60
Front Btn Access
• Enables or disables access to the Setup pages by holding the bottom left
capacitive touch button and the bottom of the directional pad. When set to
Off, the Setup pages may only be accessed through the Reset button
(FIG. 2)
Page Tracking:
• Enables or disables the G4 page tracking feature that sends page flips to the
Master via strings.
Function Show:
• When the Function Show feature is displayed, the Channel Port and Code
will appear in yellow, the Address Port and Code in green, and the Level Port
and Channel Code in purple. (Please refer to the Function Show Example
on page 61 for more information.)
Telnet:
• Controls access via Telnet.
Table Dock Latch:
• Enables and disables the docking latch on the Table Docking Station
(page 11). If User Access is Enabled in the Passwords page (page 84), this
switch will be greyed out.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
System & Panel Options Page (Cont.)
Panel Options (Cont.):
Security:
• Displays one of three security settings: Standard, Secure, and DoD. Pressing
this button opens a popup window allowing changes to the Security Profile.
NOTE: Refer to the Security Settings section on page 62 for very important
information on using this feature.
Orientation:
• Selects the orientation by which the panel pages are presented: 0° Landscape, 90° - Portrait, and 270° - Portrait.
System Options:
Reset Settings:
• Deletes all of the current configuration parameters on the panel (including IP
Addresses, Device Number assignments, Passwords, and other presets).
This option invokes a Confirmation dialog, prompting you to confirm your
selection before resetting the panel.
Install Firmware:
• This button allows you to revert the current firmware to factory default, revert
to the previously installed firmware version, or to install firmware from a
properly formatted USB thumb drive or microSD card.
Undock Panel:
• Releases the panel from the Table Docking Station (page 11) or the Wall
Docking Station (page 14).
Remove Pages:
• Removes all TPD4 touch panel pages currently on the panel, including the
pre-installed AMX Demo pages. This option invokes a Confirmation dialog,
prompting you to confirm your selection before removing the panel pages.
• Note that the YES button on the Confirmation dialog is disabled for 5
seconds as additional protection against accidentally resetting the panel or
removing the panel pages.
Install Pages:
• Allows uploading of touch panel pages via USB thumb drive or microSD
card. If the panel is not connected to a thumb drive or microSD card, this
button will be blacked out.
USB Ready:
• Notes that the panel is ready to accept files via a USB device.
Function Show Example
When the Function Show feature is displayed, the Channel Port and Code will appear
in yellow, the Address Port and Code in green, and the Level Port and Channel Code
in purple.
Channel Code
Channel Port
0.20
BUTTON
0,8
Level Port
Channel Code
0,50
Address Port
Address Code
FIG. 69 Function Show example
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
61
Protected Setup Pages
Security Settings
The Security button on the System & Options page has three settings: Standard, Secure, and DoD. Pressing the button
opens the Panel Security Setting popup window (FIG. 70):
FIG. 70 Panel Security Setting popup window
Each of the settings has different features for touch panel security:
Security Profile Features
Standard:
• Factory default, shipped in this configuration.
• Default Protected Setup Password is “1988”.
• Remote login uses Telnet.
Secure:
• Default Protected Setup Password is “Amx1234!”.
• Minimum password requirement is 8 characters with at least one numeric character.
• Remote login uses SSH.
• Remote login user name is “amx”.
• Login failure attempt pauses 4 seconds before another login attempt is allowed.
• After 3 consecutive unsuccessful SSH login attempts, login lockout is enabled for 15
minutes.
• Login and logout audit logging is enabled.
DoD:
• Default Protected Setup Password is “Amx1234!”.
• Minimum password requirement is 8 characters with at least one numeric character,
one uppercase character, one lower case character, and one special character, with
no duplicate adjacent characters.
• Remote login uses SSH.
• Remote login user name is “amx”.
• Login failure attempt pauses 4 seconds before another login attempt is allowed.
• After 3 consecutive unsuccessful SSH login attempts, login lockout is enabled for 15
minutes.
• Login and logout audit logging is enabled.
• DoD login banner is enabled.
A transition from one security mode to another will reset the Protected/Web Control/
remote login password to the default value for the current security mode (please refer
to the default passwords above). A transition to Secure or DoD mode will disable G4
Web Control. Although the security password features are immediate, a reboot must
occur for all the new security mode features to take full effect.
For more information on configuring AMX devices for a secure environment, please refer to the guide Security Profiles:
Configuring AMX Devices For Installation Into a Secure Environment, available at www.amx.com.
62
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
Installing Firmware
Pressing the Install Firmware button opens a popup window that gives three options for updates and resets (FIG. 71):
FIG. 71 Firmware Installation popup window
If the MVP-9000i needs to be returned to its factory default firmware, press the Factory button. If you have already
installed the latest available firmware version and wish to reinstall a previous version, press the Previous button. If you
wish to install new firmware from a connected microSD card or external USB stick, press the New button.
The MVP-9000i automatically detects connected microSD cards and USB thumb
drives. If a microSD card or USB thumb drive containing firmware is not connected to
the device, the New button will be greyed out. It will only be enabled if it detects a
USB drive or microSD card with a .kit file in the correct directory.
For more information on installing firmware upgrades, please refer to the Upgrading Firmware on page 93.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
63
Protected Setup Pages
System Settings Page
The System Settings page (FIG. 72) displays the NetLinx Master’s communication settings. This page contains four tabs:
Master, Wired, WiFi, and USB. Each of these tabs is covered in a separate section.
System Settings - Master
The Master tab controls the method of connection to a NetLinx Master.
FIG. 72 System Settings - Master Tab
The elements of this page include:
System Settings - Master Tab
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Current Connection:
Displays the current connection status.
Mode:
Cycles between the connection modes: URL, Listen, and Auto.
• URL - In this mode, enter the IP/URL, Master Port Number, and username/
password (if used) on the Master. The System Number field is read-only - the
panel obtains this information from the Master.
• Listen - In this mode, add the panel address into the URL List in NetLinx
Studio and set the connection mode to Listen. This mode allows the Modero
touch panel to “listen” for the Master’s communication signals. The System
Number and Master IP/URL fields are read-only.
• Auto - In this mode, enter the System Number and a username/password (if
applicable). Use this mode when both the panel and the NetLinx Master are
on the same Subnet and the Master has its UDP feature enabled. The
Master IP/URL field is read-only.
System Number:
Allows entry of a system number. Default value is 0 (zero).
(Available in Auto Mode Only - disabled when URL or Auto is selected)
Master IP/URL
Sets the Master IP or URL of the NetLinx Master.
(Available in URL Only - disabled when Listen or Auto is selected)
Master Port Num.:
Allows entry of the port number used with the NetLinx Master. Default = 1319.
NOTE: Both Auto and Listen Modes only support use of port 1319.
64
Username:
If the target Master has been previously secured, enter the alpha-numeric string
(into each field) assigned to a pre-configured user profile on the Master. This
profile should have the pre-defined level of access/configuration rights.
Password:
If the target Master has been previously secured, enter the alpha-numeric string
(into each field) assigned to a pre-configured user profile on the Master. This
profile should have the pre-defined level of access/configuration rights.
NDP Name:
Displays the name of the device connecting to the Master.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
System Settings - Wired
Use the options on the Wired Tab (FIG. 73) to configure communication settings for Ethernet communication with the
MVP-9000i.
FIG. 73 System Settings - Wired Tab
Features on this page include:
System Settings - Wired Tab
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image
of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
DHCP/STATIC:
Sets the panel to either DHCP or Static communication modes.
• DHCP - a temporary IP Addresses is assigned to the panel by a DHCP
server. If DHCP is selected, the other IP Settings fields are disabled (see
below).
• Static IP is a permanent IP Address assigned to the panel. If Static IP is
selected, the other IP Settings fields are enabled (see below).
IP Address:
This is the IP address for this panel.
Subnet Mask:
This is the subnet mask for this panel.
Gateway:
This is the gateway address for this panel.
Host Name:
This is the host name for this panel.
Primary DNS:
This is the address of the primary DNS server used by this panel for host name
lookups.
Secondary DNS:
This is the secondary DNS address for this panel.
Domain:
This is a domain name to the panel for DNS look-up.
MAC Address
This unique address identifies the wireless Ethernet card in the panel (readonly).
If the touch panel will not be used in a docking station, or if the docking station will not
have network connectivity (i.e., if the docking station is being used only to charge the
device), using the default DHCP setting for the wired interface is highly
recommended. Configuring a static IP address on the Wired Settings page without
network connectivity may lead to a loss of connection.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
65
Protected Setup Pages
System Settings - WiFi
The options on the Systems Settings - WiFi tab (FIG. 74) include the wireless security methods supported by the WiFi
card. These security methods incorporate WPA, WPA2, and EAP technology, some of which require the upload of unique
certificate files to a target panel. Refer to the Appendix B: Wireless Technology section on page 180 for further
information.
FIG. 74 System Settings - WiFi Tab
Features on this tab include:
System Settings - WiFi Tab
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image
of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
DHCP/STATIC:
Sets the panel to either DHCP or Static communication modes.
• DHCP - a temporary IP Addresses is assigned to the panel by a DHCP
server. If DHCP is selected, the other IP Settings fields are disabled (see
below).
• Static IP is a permanent IP Address assigned to the panel. If Static IP is
selected, the other IP Settings fields are enabled (see below).
66
IP Address:
This is the IP address for this panel.
Subnet Mask:
This is the subnetwork address for this panel.
Gateway:
This is the gateway address for this panel.
Host Name:
This is the host name for this panel.
Primary DNS:
This is the address of the primary DNS server used by this panel for host name
lookups.
Secondary DNS:
This is the secondary DNS address for this panel.
Domain:
This is a domain name to the panel for DNS look-up.
MAC Address:
This unique address identifies the wireless Ethernet card in the panel (readonly).
Next:
Touch this button to move to the second page of the WiFi tab (page 67)
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
FIG. 75 System Settings - WiFi Tab (page 2)
Features on the second page of this tab include:
System Settings - WiFi Tab - Page 2
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image
of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
SSID:
Displays the currently used SSID of the target AP.
Mode:
Displays the currently selected security mode within the Simple or Enterprise
security modes. This may be changed within the Simple or Enterprise Security
mode popup windows (for more information, please refer to the Security Modes
on page 68).
Security Type:
Displays the currently selected Security Mode: Simple or Enterprise.
Band Selection:
The Band Selection setting is used for setting the Wireless frequency to be
detected by the panel. The three settings include:
• 802.11 a/b/g - Configures the panel to detect 802.11 b/g channels (1-14
Country specific) and all non-DFS 802.11a band channels.
• 802.11 b/g - Configures the panel to detect only channels 1, 6, & 11 (plus 1214 country specific).
• 802.11 a - Configures the panel to detect only non-DFS 802.11 A band
channels (country-specific).
NOTE: The band selection setting also affects any use of the Site Survey
function. However, it may take approximately 60 seconds to purge all
non-compliant APs from the Site Survey list when first selected.
Active Roaming:
Active roaming can be Disabled or Enabled. When enabled, the panel will
monitor the RF signal level and make a decision to switch to a new AP based on
certain criteria to provide the best performance possible. When disabled, the
panel will not disconnect from a currently connected access point until signal is
lost.
AP MAC:
This field contains the Access Point MAC address in which the panel is
connected. It also is used to display supplicant status during authentication and
association as the panel first connects to the access point.
Channel:
The RF channel being used for connection to the AP (read -only).
Signal Level Value:
This indicator displays a description of the signal strength of the Access Point
signal.
Signal Level:
Provides a graphical representation of the Signal Level Value.
Prev.
Touch this button to return to the first page of the WiFi tab.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
67
Protected Setup Pages
System Settings - WiFi Tab - Page 2 (Cont.)
Site Survey:
Touching this button launches the Wireless Site Survey page. The options on
this page allow you to detect (“sniff-out”) all APs transmitting within range of the
panel’s WiFi card.
NOTE: Wireless connectivity will be unavailable while running a site survey.
Security Modes:
Security for WiFi connections is available in Simple Mode or Enterprise Mode.
Touch the appropriate button to open the pop-up window for each mode.
Some encryption and security features may or may not be supported:
Wireless Security Support
802.11a/b/g WiFi card:
• Open (Clear Text)
• Static WEP (64-bit and 128-bit key lengths)
• WPA-PSK
• EAP security (with and without certificates)
Refer to the Configuring Wireless Network Access section on page 29 for more information on configuring the panel for
wireless network access using the various security options.
Security Modes
The Security Modes section on the second page of the WiFi tab has two buttons: Simple and Enterprise. Pressing the
Simple button opens the Wireless Security: Simple Mode popup window (FIG. 76), which offers wireless security
options suitable for most home and office environments such as Open (page 69), WEP (page 69), and WPA-PSK
(page 71). For more secure options, such as for corporate environments, the Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode popup
window (FIG. 77) offers EAP-LEAP (page 72), EAP-FAST (page 74), EAP-PEAP (page 76), EAP-TTLS (page 77), and
EAP-TLS (page 79).
FIG. 76 Wireless Security: Simple Mode popup window
FIG. 77 Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode popup window
68
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
Open
From the Security Modes options, press the Simple button to open the Wireless Security: Simple Mode page. Scroll
through the Security Type options to select Open (FIG. 78).
FIG. 78 Wireless Security: Simple Mode - Open
Open security does not utilize any encryption methodology, but requires an SSID (alpha-numeric) entry.
This entry must match the Network Name (SSID) entry of the target AP so the panel knows what device it is using to
communicate with the network.
Open Settings
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target AP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the AP, and is assigned to all panels on
that network. An SSID is required by the AP before the panel is permitted to
join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network.
• If this field is left blank, the panel will attempt to connect to the first
available AP.
Cancel/Save:
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
Refer to the Configuring Wireless Network Access section on page 29 and the Using the Wireless Site Survey Tool section
on page 30 for further details on these security options.
WEP
From the Security Modes options, press the Simple button to open the Wireless Security: Simple Mode page. Scroll
through the Security Type options to select WEP (FIG. 79).
FIG. 79 Wireless Security: Simple Mode - WEP
WEP security requires that both a target AP be identified and an encryption method be implemented prior to establishing
communication. In addition to providing Open Authentication capabilities, this page also supports Hexadecimal and
ASCII keys.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
69
Protected Setup Pages
WEP
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target AP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the AP, and is assigned to all panels on
that network. An SSID is required by the AP before the panel is permitted to
join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network.
64 /128:
Cycles through the available encryption options: 64 or 128 Bit Key Size.
“WEP” (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is an 802.11 security protocol designed to
provide wireless security.
• 64 enables WEP encryption using a 64 Bit Key Size. All packets are
transmitted with their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key.
• 128 enables WEP encryption using a 128 Bit Key Size. All packets are
transmitted with their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key.
• If the key is not the correct size, the system will resize it to match the
number of bits required for the WEP encryption mode selected.
WEP Keys:
This feature provides another level of security by selecting up to four WEP
Keys.
Push any of the four buttons to open an on-screen keyboard. Both ASCII and
HEX keys are supported. Up to four keys can be configured for both.
• An ASCII key utilizes either 5 or 13 ASCII characters
• A HEX key utilizes either 10 or 26 Hexidecimal characters
Press Done to accept any changes and save the new value.
Note: A 64-bit key will be 10 characters in length while a 128-bit key will be
26 characters in length. The length of the key entered determines the level of
WEP encryption employed (64 or 128-bit). 128-bit keys may be used if
supported by the internal wireless card.
Default Key:
Cycles through the four available WEP key identifiers to select a WEP key to
use. As the Default Key value is altered (through selection) the corresponding
“Current Key” is displayed. Each Current Key corresponds to a WEP key.
This feature is useful for accessing different networks without having to
re-enter that networks’ WEP key. It is also sometimes used to set up a
rotating key schedule to provide an extra layer of security.
Current Key:
Displays the current WEP key in use.
• When working with a single panel and a single AP, manually entering the
Current Key from the AP into the selected WEP Key is recommended.
• When working with a single AP and multiple panels, generating a Current
Key using the same passphrase on all panels and then entering the
panel-produced WEP key manually into the Wireless Access Point is
recommended.
• Keys may also be examined by touching the key buttons and noting the
keyboard initialization text.
• Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to erase stored key
information.
Authentication:
Allows only one authentication mode: Open (broadcast publicly).
• An Open network allows connections from any client without
authentication.
If WEP encryption has been enabled, the client will require the WEP key to
encrypt and decrypt packets in order to communicate with the network.
Cancel/Save:
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
Refer to the Configuring Wireless Network Access section on page 29 and the Using the Wireless Site Survey Tool section
on page 30 for further details on these security options.
70
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
WPA-PSK
From the Security Modes options, press the Simple button to open the Wireless Security: Simple Mode page. Scroll
through the Security Type options to select WPA-PSK (FIG. 80).
FIG. 80 Wireless Security: Simple Mode - WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK security is designed for environments where using WPA or WPA2 is desirable, but an 802.1x authentication
server is not available. PSK connections are more secure than WEP and are simpler to configure, since they implement
dynamic keys but share a key between the AP and the panel (client).
Using WPA-PSK, the encryption on the AP could either be WPA or WPA2. The firmware in the panel will automatically
connect to the AP using the correct encryption. The WPA encryption type is configured on the AP, not in the firmware.
APs do not display “WPA” or “WPA2” on their configuration screens:
WPA is normally displayed as TKIP.
WPA2 is normally displayed as AES CCMP.
The following fields are required: SSID and Password/Pass Phrase.
Enter the SSID of the AP.
Enter a pass phrase with a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 63.
The exact same pass phrase (including capitalization) must be entered in the access point.
WPA-PSK Settings
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target AP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the AP, and is assigned to all panels on
that network. An SSID is required by the AP before the panel is permitted to
join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network.
Password:
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter a passphrase (password).
• This alpha-numeric string must use a minimum of 8 characters and a
maximum of 63.
• The exact pass phrase string (including capitalization) must be entered on
the target AP.
Cancel/Save:
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
Refer to the Configuring Wireless Network Access section on page 29 for details on these security options.
Refer to the Using the Wireless Site Survey Tool section on page 30 for more information on using this tool.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
71
Protected Setup Pages
EAP Security & Server Certificates - Overview
The following EAP types all support a server certificate:
EAP-PEAP
EAP-TTLS
EAP-TLS
All three of these certificate-using security methods are documented in the following sections. EAP Authentication goes
a step beyond simply encrypting data transfers, but also requires that a set of credentials be validated before the client
(panel) is allowed to connect to the rest of the network (FIG. 81). Please note that no user intervention is necessary
during this process, as it proceeds automatically based on the configuration parameters entered into the panel.
LAN
802.1x
(EAP over Wireless)
Client - Panel
(supplicant)
Authenticator
(Wireless Access Point)
Authentication Server
(RADIUS Server)
FIG. 81 EAP security method in process
A server certificate file uses a certificate installed in a panel so that the RADIUS server can be validated before the panel
tries to connect to it. The field name associated with this file is Certificate Authority.
If a server certificate is used, it should first be downloaded into the panel and the Certificate Authority field should then
be set to the name of that certificate file. No file path should be used for this setting, as all certificates are stored in a
specific directory that the user cannot control or change. The most secure connection method uses a server certificate.
If no server certificate will be used, this field should be left blank. If the field contains a file name, then a valid certificate
file with the same file name must be previously installed on the panel. Otherwise the authentication process will fail.
EAP-LEAP
From the Security Modes options, press the Enterprise button to open the Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode page.
Scroll through the Security Type options to select EAP-LEAP (FIG. 82).
FIG. 82 Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode - EAP-LEAP
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an Enterprise authentication protocol that can be used in both wired and
wireless network environments. EAP requires the use of an 802.1x Authentication Server, also known as a Radius server.
The configuration fields described below take variable length strings as inputs. An on-screen keyboard is opened when
these fields are selected.
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) was developed to transmit authentication information securely
in a wireless network environment.
72
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
LEAP does not use client (panel) or server (RADIUS) certificates, and is therefore
one of the least secure EAP security methods. However, it can be utilized
successfully by implementing sufficiently complex passwords.
EAP-LEAP security is designed for wireless environments where having a client or server certificate validation scheme
in place is not required, yet necessary to transmit data securely over a wireless network.
EAP-LEAP
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target AP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the AP, and is assigned to all panels on
that network. An SSID is required by the AP before the panel is
permitted to join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in the wireless network.
• With EAP security, the SSID of the AP must be entered. If it is left blank,
the panel will try to connect to the first access point detected that supports
EAP. However, a successful connection is not guaranteed because the
detected AP may be connected to a RADIUS server, which may not
support this EAP type and/or have the proper user identities configured.
Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter an EAP Identity string (used by the
panel to identify itself to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server).
Note: This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured
server or workstation. This works in tandem with the Password string which is
similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation.
Typically, this is in the form of a username such as jdoe@amx.com.
Password:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter the network password string specified
for the user entered within the Identity field (used by the panel to identify itself
to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server)
Note: This information is similar to the password entered to gain access to a
secured workstation.
Key Mgmt:
This button has 4 options:
WPA-EAP: The default and most common setting for EAP authentication
methods. Accepts WPA, WPA2 & TKIP, or AES.
8021X: Used to specify IEEE 802.1x port authentication only.
CCKM-WPA: Cisco key management option. Used with CCKM and WPA
(TKIP encryption only) authentication.
CCKM-WPA2: Cisco key management option. Used with CCKM and WPA2
(AES encryption only) authentication.
NOTE: The Key Mgmt selection must match the security settings on the AP
in order for the connection to be successful.
Cancel/Save:
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 178 for further details on these security options.
Refer to FIG. 83 for an example of how a typical EAP-LEAP system configuration page should appear.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
73
Protected Setup Pages
FIG. 83 EAP-LEAP sample Cisco System Security page
EAP-FAST
From the Security Modes options, press the Enterprise button to open the Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode page.
Scroll through the Security Type options to select EAP-FAST (FIG. 84).
FIG. 84 Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode - EAP-FAST
EAP-FAST (Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling) security was designed for wireless environments where
security and ease of setup are equally desirable. EAP-FAST uses a certificate file, however it can be configured to
download the certificate automatically the first time the panel attempts to authenticate itself. Automatic certificate
downloading is convenient but slightly less secure, since its the certificate is transferred wirelessly and could
theoretically be “sniffed-out”.
EAP-FAST
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target AP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the AP, and is assigned to all panels on
that network. An SSID is required by the AP before the panel is permitted to
join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in the wireless network.
• With EAP security, the SSID of the AP must be entered. If it is left blank,
the panel will try to connect to the first access point detected that supports
EAP. However, a successful connection is not guaranteed because the
detected AP may be connected to a RADIUS server, which may not
support this EAP type and/or have the proper user identities configured.
Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter an EAP Identity string (used by the
panel to identify itself to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server).
Note: This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured
server or workstation. This works in tandem with the Password string which is
similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation.
Typically, this is in the form of a username such as: jdoe@amx.com.
74
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
EAP-FAST (Cont.)
Anonymous Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter an IT provided alphanumeric string
which (similar to the username) is used as the identity, but that does not
represent a real user.
This information is used as a fictitious name which might be seen by sniffer
programs during the initial connection and setup process between the panel
and the Radius server. In this way the real identity (username) is protected.
Typically, this is in the form of a fictitious username, such as
anonymous@amx.com
Password:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter the network password string specified
for the user entered within the Identity field (used by the panel to identify itself
to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server)
Note: This information is similar to the password entered to gain access to a
secured workstation.
Key Mgmt:
This button has 4 options:
WPA-EAP: The default and most common setting for EAP authentication
methods. Accepts WPA, WPA2 & TKIP, or AES.
8021X: Used to specify IEEE 802.1x port authentication only.
CCKM-WPA: Cisco key management option. Used with CCKM and WPA
(TKIP encryption only) authentication.
CCKM-WPA2: Cisco key management option. Used with CCKM and WPA2
(AES encryption only) authentication.
NOTE: The Key Mgmt selection must match the security settings on the AP
in order for the connection to be successful.
Automatic PAC
Provisioning:
This selection toggles PAC (Protected Access Credential) Provisioning Enabled (automatic) or Disabled (manual).
• If Enabled is selected, the following PAC File Location field is disabled,
because the search for the PAC file is done automatically.
• If Disabled is selected, the user is required to manually locate a file
containing the PAC shared secret credentials for use in authentication. In
this case, the IT department must create a PAC file and then transfer it into
the panel using the AMX Certificate Upload application.
Note: Even when automatic provisioning is enabled, the PAC certificate is
only downloaded the first time that the panel connects to the RADIUS server.
This file is then saved into the panel's file system and is then reused from
then on. It is possible for the user to change a setting, such as a new Identity,
that would invalidate this certificate. In that case, the panel must be forced to
download a new PAC file.
To do this, set Automatic PAC Provisioning to Disabled and then back to
Enabled. This forces the firmware to delete the old file and request a new
one.
PAC File Location:
This field is used when the previous Automatic PAC Provisioning option has
been Disabled.
• When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen PAC File Location
keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the file containing the PAC
shared secret credentials for use in authentication.
• This field is only valid when the automatic PAC provisioning feature has
been enabled via the previous field.
Auto Key Renewal:
• Select between NEVER, 1 Day, 3 Days, 7 Days, 14 Days, and 30 Days.
Cancel/Save:
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 178 and the Using the Wireless Site Survey Tool section on page 30 for
further details on these security options.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
75
Protected Setup Pages
EAP-PEAP
From the Security Modes options, press the Enterprise button to open the Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode page.
Scroll through the Security Type options to select EAP-PEAP (FIG. 85).
FIG. 85 Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode - EAP-PEAP
PEAP (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol) was developed as a way to securely transmit authentication
information, such as passwords, over a wireless network environment. PEAP uses only server-side public key certificates
and therefore does not need a client (panel) certificate which makes the configuration and setup easier.
There are two main versions of the PEAP protocol supported by panel’s Devicecape Wireless Client:
PEAPv0
PEAPv1
PEAP uses inner authentication mechanisms supported by the Devicescape Wireless Client, the most common of which
are:
MSCHAPv2 with PEAPv0
GTC with PEAPv1
EAP-PEAP security is designed for wireless environments where it is necessary to transmit data securely over a wireless
network.
EAP-PEAP
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target AP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the AP, and is assigned to all panels on
that network. An SSID is required by the AP before the panel is permitted to
join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in the wireless network.
• With EAP security, the SSID of the AP must be entered. If it is left blank,
the panel will try to connect to the first access point detected that supports
EAP. However, a successful connection is not guaranteed because the
detected AP may be connected to a RADIUS server, which may not
support this EAP type and/or have the proper user identities configured.
Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter an EAP Identity string (used by the
panel to identify itself to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server).
Note: This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured
server or workstation. This works in tandem with the Password string, which
is similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation.
Typically, this is in the form of a username such as jdoe@amx.com.
Password:
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the network password string specified
for the user entered within the Identity field (used by the panel to identify itself
to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server)
Note: This information is similar to the password entered to gain access to a
secured workstation.
76
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
EAP-PEAP Settings (Cont.)
Certificate Authority:
When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen Certificate Authority (CA)
File Location keyboard, which allows you to enter the name of the certificate
authority file which is used to validate the server certificate.This field is
optional.
If a server certificate is used, it should first be downloaded into the panel and
the Certificate Authority field should then be set to the name of that certificate
file. No file path should be used for this setting as all certificates are stored in
a specific directory that the user cannot control or change.
Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to erase completely any
previously stored network path information.
PEAP Version:
When pressed, this field cycles through the choices of available PEAP:
PEAPv0, PEAPv1, or PEAPv1 w/peaplabel=1.
Inner Authentication Type:
When pressed, this field cycles through the choices of available Inner
Authentication mechanisms supported by the Devicescape Secure Wireless
Client. The most commonly used are: MSCHAPv2 and GTC.
• MSCHAPv2 (used with PEAPv0)
• GTC (used with PEAPv1)
• OTP
• MD5
Key Mgmt:
This button has 4 options:
WPA-EAP: The default and most common setting for EAP authentication
methods. Accepts WPA, WPA2 & TKIP, or AES.
8021X: Used to specify IEEE 802.1x port authentication only.
CCKM-WPA: Cisco key management option. Used with CCKM and WPA
(TKIP encryption only) authentication.
CCKM-WPA2: Cisco key management option. Used with CCKM and WPA2
(AES encryption only) authentication.
NOTE: The Key Mgmt selection must match the security settings on the AP
in order for the connection to be successful.
Cancel/Save:
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 178 and the Using the Wireless Site Survey Tool section on page 30 for
further details on these security options.
EAP-TTLS
From the Security Modes options, press the Enterprise button to open the Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode page.
Scroll through the Security Type options to select EAP-TTLS (FIG. 86).
FIG. 86 Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode - EAP-TTLS
TTLS (EAP Tunneled Transport Layer Security) is an authentication method that does not use a client certificate to
authenticate the panel. However. this method is more secure than PEAP because it does not broadcast the identity of the
user. Setup is similar to PEAP, but differs in the following areas:
An anonymous identity must be specified until the secure tunnel between the panel and the Radius server is
setup to transfer the real identity of the user.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
77
Protected Setup Pages
There is no end-user ability to select from the different types of PEAP.
Additional Inner Authentication choices are available to the end-user.
EAP-TTLS security is designed for wireless environments where the Radius server needs to validate directly the identity
of the client (panel) before allowing it access to the network. This validation is done by tunneling a connection through
the AP and directly between the panel and the Radius server. Once the client is identified and then validated, the Radius
server disconnects the tunnel and allows the panel to access the network directly via the target AP.
EAP-TTLS
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard to enter the SSID name used on the target AP.
The SSID is a unique name used by the AP, and is assigned to all panels on
that network. An SSID is required by the AP before the panel is
permitted to join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in the wireless network.
• With EAP security, the SSID of the AP must be entered. If it is left blank,
the panel will try to connect to the first access point detected that supports
EAP. However, a successful connection is not guaranteed because the
detected AP may be connected to a RADIUS server, which may not
support this EAP type and/or have the proper user identities configured.
Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter an EAP Identity string (used by the
panel to identify itself to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server).
Note: This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured
server or workstation. This works in tandem with the Password string which is
similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation.
Typically, this is in the form of a username such as: jdoe@amx.com.
Anonymous Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter an IT provided alpha-numeric string
which (similar to the username) used as the identity, but that does not
represent a real user.
This information is used as a fictitious name which might be seen by sniffer
programs during the initial connection and setup process between the panel
and the Radius server. In this way the real identity (username) is protected.
Typically, this is in the form of a fictitious username such as:
anonymous@amx.com
Password:
Opens an on-screen keyboard. Enter the network password string specified
for the user entered within the Identity field (used by the panel to identify itself
to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server)
Note: This information is similar to the password entered to gain access to a
secured workstation.
Certificate Authority:
When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen Certificate Authority (CA)
File Location keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the certificate
authority file which is used to validate the server certificate. This field is
optional.
If a server certificate is used, it should first be downloaded into the panel and
the Certificate Authority field should then be set to the name of that certificate
file. No file path should be used for this setting as all certificates are stored in
a specific directory that the user cannot control or change.
Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to completely erase any
previously stored network path information.
78
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
EAP-TTLS (Cont.)
Inner Authentication Type:
When pressed, this field cycles through the choices of available Inner
Authentication mechanism supported by the Devicescape Secure Wireless
Client:
• EAP-MSCHAPv2
• EAP-GTC
• EAP-OTP
• EAP-MD5
• MSCHAPv2
• MSCHAP
• PAP
• CHAP
Key Mgmt:
This button has 4 options:
WPA-EAP: The default and most common setting for EAP authentication
methods. Accepts WPA, WPA2 & TKIP, or AES.
8021X: Used to specify IEEE 802.1x port authentication only.
CCKM-WPA: Cisco key management option. Used with CCKM and WPA
(TKIP encryption only) authentication.
CCKM-WPA2: Cisco key management option. Used with CCKM and WPA2
(AES encryption only) authentication.
NOTE: The Key Mgmt selection must match the security settings on the AP
in order for the connection to be successful.
Cancel/Save:
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 178 and the Using the Wireless Site Survey Tool section on page 30 for
further details on these security options.
EAP-TLS
From the Security Modes options, press the Enterprise button to open the Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode page.
Scroll through the Security Type options to select EAP-TLS (FIG. 87).
FIG. 87 Wireless Security: Enterprise Mode - EAP-TLS
TLS (Transport Layer Security) was the original standard wireless LAN EAP authentication protocol. TLS requires
additional work during the deployment phase, but provides additional security since even a compromised password is not
enough to break into an EAP-TLS protected wireless network environment.
EAP-TLS security is designed for wireless environments where it is necessary to securely transmit data over a wireless
network by adding an additional level of security protocol via the use of a private key.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
79
Protected Setup Pages
EAP-TLS
SSID (Service Set Identifier):
Opens an on-screen keyboard for entering the SSID name used on the target
AP. The SSID is a unique name used by the AP, and is assigned to all panels
on that network. An SSID is required by the AP before the panel is permitted
to join the network.
• The SSID is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters.
• Make sure this setting is the same for all points in the wireless network.
• With EAP security, the SSID of the AP must be entered. If it is left blank,
the panel will try to connect to the first access point detected that supports
EAP. However, a successful connection is not guaranteed because the
detected AP may be connected to a RADIUS server, which may not
support this EAP type and/or have the proper user identities configured.
Identity:
Opens an on-screen keyboard for entering an EAP Identity string (used by
the panel to identify itself to an Authentication (RADIUS) Server).
Note: This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured
server or workstation. This works in tandem with the Password string, which
is similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation.
Typically, this is in the form of a username such as: jdoe@amx.com.
Certificate Authority:
When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen Certificate Authority (CA)
File Location keyboard, for entering the name of the certificate authority file
which is used to validate the server certificate.
This field is optional.
If a server certificate is used, it should first be downloaded into the panel and
the Certificate Authority field should then be set to the name of that certificate
file. No file path should be used for this setting, as all certificates are stored in
a specific directory that the user cannot control or change.
• Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to completely erase any
previously stored network path information.
Key Mgmt:
This button has 4 options:
WPA-EAP: The default and most common setting for EAP authentication
methods. Accepts WPA, WPA2 & TKIP, or AES.
8021X: Used to specify IEEE 802.1x port authentication only.
CCKM-WPA: Cisco key management option. Used with CCKM and WPA
(TKIP encryption only) authentication.
CCKM-WPA2: Cisco key management option. Used with CCKM and WPA2
(AES encryption only) authentication.
NOTE: The Key Mgmt selection must match the security settings on the AP
in order for the connection to be successful.
Client Certificate:
Opens an on-screen keyboard for entering the name of the file containing the
client (panel) certificate for use in certifying the identity of the client (panel).
• Refer to the Client Certificate Configuration section on page 81 for
information regarding Client Certificates and their parameters.
Private Key:
When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen Client Private Key File
Location keyboard for entering the name of the file containing the private key.
• Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to completely erase any
previously stored network path information.
Private Key password:
This field should only be used if the Private Key is protected with a password.
If no password protection is associated with the Private Key, then this field
should be left blank.
• When pressed, the panel displays an on-screen Private Key Password
keyboard which allows you to enter an alpha-numeric password string.
• Use the on-screen keyboard’s Clear button to completely erase any
previously stored network path information.
Cancel/Save:
• Cancel - discard changes and return to the previous page.
• Save - store the new security information, apply changes, and return to the
previous page.
Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 178 for further details on these security options.
80
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
Refer to the Using the Wireless Site Survey Tool section on page 30 for more information on using this
feature.
Client Certificate Configuration
A client certificate can be configured by an IT department in several ways. The client certificate and private key can both
be incorporated into one file or split into two separate files. In addition, the file format used by these files could be PEM,
DER, or PKCS12. These formats are described later in this section. The following table describes how to fill in the fields
for each possible case.
Client Certificate Configuration
Certificate Configuration
Client Certificate Field Private Key Field
Single file contains both the client certificate and
the private key. Format is: PEM or DER.
Enter the file name
Enter the same file name
First file contains the client certificate, second file
contains the private key. Format is: PEM or DER.
Enter the first file name
Enter the second file name
Single file contains both the client certificate and
the private key. Format is: PKCS12
Leave this field blank
Enter the file name
First file contains the client certificate, second file
contains the private key. Format is: PKCS12
Not supported
Not supported
AMX supports the following security certificates
PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail)
DER (Distinguished Encoding Rules)
PKCS12 (Public Key Cryptography Standard #12)
PKCS12 files are frequently generated by Microsoft certificate applications.
Otherwise, PEM is more common.
Certificate files frequently use 5 file extensions. It can be confusing because there is not a one to one correspondence.
The following table shows the possible file extension used for each certificate type:
Certificates and their Extensions
Certificate Type
PEM
Possible File Extensions
.cer
.pem
.pvk
DER
.cer
.der
PKCS12
.pfx
Please note which certificate types are supported by the different certificate fields used on the configuration screens
(PEAP, TTLS, and TLS). The following table outlines the firmware fields and their supported certificate types.
Certificate Types Supported by the Modero Firmware
Configuration Field Name Certificate File Type Supported
Certificate Authority field
PEM and DER
Client Certificate field
PEM and DER
Private Key field
.PEM, DER, and PKCS12
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
81
Protected Setup Pages
System Settings - USB
The USB tab (FIG. 88) controls the ability for the MVP-9000i to connect to a network via a USB connection.
FIG. 88 System Settings page - USB tab
The features on the USB tab include:
System Settings - USB Tab
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired (image
of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
DHCP/Static:
This field will always display Static.
IP Address:
Displays the secondary IP address for the panel. The last series of digits may
be edited, with a host number added between 2 and 254.
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask address for the panel.
Calibrate Page
The Calibrate page (FIG. 89) allows you to calibrate the touch panel for accurate button selection.
FIG. 89 Calibrate page
1. From the Protected Setup page, touch the Calibration button to open the Calibrate page.
The Calibrate page may also be accessed by holding the lower left capacitive touch
button and the directional pad for 6 seconds, or by pressing the Reset button on the
left side of the device for 9 seconds.
2. Press the crosshairs in turn. If the crosshairs are not touched within ten seconds, the MVP-9000i will return to the
Protected Setup page.
82
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
3. The page will read "Calibration Successful. Touch to continue." Touch anywhere on the screen to return to the
Protected Setup page.
If the screen is not touched at that point, the device will automatically return to the
Protected Setup page within 10 seconds.
Always calibrate the panel before its initial use, and after downloading new firmware.
The Calibrate page may also be accessed by pressing down and holding the Reset
button on the side of the panel for 9 seconds. For more information, please refer to
the Accessing the Setup pages section on page 43.
G4 Web Control Settings Page
An on-board VNC (Virtual Network Computing) server allows the panel to connect to any remote PC running a VNC
client. Once connected, the client can view and control the panel remotely. The options on this page allow you to enable/
disable G4 Web Control functionality (FIG. 90).
FIG. 90 G4 Web Control Settings page
Features on this page include:
G4 Web Control Settings Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
G4 Web Control:
The G4 Web Control button toggles between the two G4 activation settings:
• Off - deactivates G4 Web Control on the panel.
• On - activates G4 Web Control on the panel.
Timeout:
Sets the length of time (in minutes) that the panel can remain idle, detecting no
cursor movements, before the G4 Web Control session is terminated.
• Minimum value = Off (panel never times out)
• Maximum value = 4 h (panel times out after 4 hours)
Control Name:
Use this field to enter a unique alpha-numeric string to be used as the panel’s
display name within the Manage WebControl Connections window of the
NetLinx Security browser window.
Control Password:
Use this field to enter the G4 Authentication session password required for
VNC access to the panel. This password is limited to between 1 and 8
characters.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
83
Protected Setup Pages
G4 Web Control Settings Page (Cont.)
Control Port:
Use this field to enter the number of the port used by the VNC Web Server.
Default = 5900.
Max Connects:
Displays the maximum number of users that can be simultaneously connected
to this panel via VNC. Default = 1.
Connect Count:
Displays the number of users currently connected to this panel via VNC.
Default = 1.
Refer to the Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel section on page 39 for
instructions on using the G4 Web Control page with the web-based NetLinx Security
application.
The panel MUST be rebooted to save changes made on this page.
Passwords
The options on the Passwords page (FIG. 91) allow assignment of passwords required for users to access the Protected
Setup page, and to release the device from a Table or Wall Docking Station.
FIG. 91 Passwords page
Features on this page include:
Passwords Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
In Panel Password
Change:
Accesses the alphanumeric values associated to particular password sets.
• The PASSWORD 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 (protected) buttons open a keyboard to
enter alphanumeric values associated to the selected password group.
Note: Clearing Password #5 removes the need to enter a password before
accessing the Protected Setup page.
84
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
Passwords Page (Cont.)
User Access:
Use these buttons to access and modify the user name/password combinations
required for removing the panel from a docking station. The number of user
access passwords on the panel is limited only by the amount of storage
memory available.
Use the UP/DN buttons to scroll through the list of saved User Access user
names and passwords.
NOTE: Enabling User Access disables and greys out the Table Dock Latch
option on the System & Panel Options page (page 60).
Enable/Enabled:
The Enable button allows you to toggle between activating or deactivating the
MVP panel requirement of a user to enter a pre-defined password before
removing the panel from a connected docking station:
• Off - does not prompt the user for a password, the docking station just
releases the panel when the security release pushbutton is pressed.
• On - requires that a valid password from the User Access list be entered
before removing a panel from a docking station.
Report:
The Report button enables/disables reporting the panel’s docking status to the
Master.
To change a previously established password:
1. In the Password Settings page, press the button in the In Panel Password Change section for the particular password
to be changed.
Password 5 is protected, and can only be changed by the Administrator.
2. In the Password keyboard, enter the new alphanumeric password.
3. Press Done when complete.
Only one of the main passwords may be used to access the Protected Settings page.
An individual user password may not be used to access the Protected Settings page
unless it matches one of the main passwords.
To list a new user within the User Access section:
1. Press a blank button in the User Access section.
2. In the Name keyboard, enter the user’s name or nickname and press Done when finished.
3. In the Password keyboard, enter the selected alphanumeric password and press Done when finished.
4. The new user’s name will appear in the left column of User Access section. The password will also appear in the
right column, but its characters will be replaced with asterisks.
No matter how many characters are in an actual password, the Password column in
the User Access section will always show five asterisks.
To change a User Access password:
1. Press the button corresponding to the user’s name in the User Access section.
2. In the Password keyboard, enter the user’s password and press Done.
3. Press the password button in the right column of the User Access section.
4. Enter the new password into the Password keyboard and press Done.
To send undocking reports to the Master:
1. From the Password Settings page, press the Report button to enable it. The MVP-9000i will send a report to the
Master of undockings in the form of an “undock-<user>” string.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
85
Protected Setup Pages
For more information on removing an MVP-9000i from a MVP-WDS-9 Docking
Station, please refer to the Unlocking the Touch Panel on page 15.
Panel Logs Page
The Panel Logs page (FIG. 92) chronicles all previous connections between the device and the network
FIG. 92 Panel Logs page
The features on this page include:
Panel Logs Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Clear:
Clears all connection logs.
Refresh:
Refreshes displayed log information.
Page:
Displays the current log page number. Use the Up/Down arrows to select log
pages.
Cache Settings Page
The options on the Cache Settings page (FIG. 93) allow setting and clearing of the flash memory cache, as well as
viewing the status of the current cache settings. The G4 graphics engine caches images to decrease load time of
previously viewed images. RAM caching is always enabled, and both static and dynamic images are stored in the RAM
cache as they are viewed. The size of RAM cache is automatically configured to take into account available memory
versus memory that may be needed by the panel later. As the RAM cache approaches its maximum size, the oldest items
in the cache may be discarded to make room for newer items. If Flash caching is enabled, dynamic images that would
have been discarded will actually be moved to Flash, since retrieving images on Flash is typically faster than across a
network, although it is slower than using a RAM cache. Note that since static images are already stored on Flash, they
are never moved to the Flash cache, so Flash caching applies only to dynamic images. Images in Flash cache are moved
back to RAM cache the next time they are viewed. As the Flash cache approaches its maximum size, the least recently
used items may be discarded to make room for new items.
Cache is best used on slow networks. On high-speed networks, cache should be
disabled.
86
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
FIG. 93 Cache Settings page
The features on this page include:
Cache Settings Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Image Cache Status
RAM Max Size:
The maximum size allocated to the RAM cache.
RAM Size:
The size of the current RAM cache contents.
RAM Hit Rate:
The percentage of recent image requests satisfied by accessing the RAM
cache.
RAM Items:
The total number of cached images in the RAM cache.
Flash Size:
The size of the current Flash cache contents.
Flash Hit Rate:
The percentage of dynamic image requests not satisfied by accessing the RAM
cache, but satisfied by accessing the Flash cache.
Flash Items:
The total number of cached images in the Flash cache.
Image Cache Settings
Flash Cache Size:
Use the Up/Down buttons to increase or decrease the total size of the flash
memory cache. The maximum varies based on free Flash space.
Cache Expires:
Use the Up/Down buttons to control the amount of time elapsed before the
panel automatically deletes its cache, with increments of 2 hours, 8 hours, 1
day, 2 days, 5 days, and "NEVER".
Clear Cache:
Clears the contents of both the RAM and Flash caches.
On/Off:
Saves any changes made to the Flash Cache Size or Cache Expires fields.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
87
Protected Setup Pages
Panel Statistics Page
The Panel Statistics page (FIG. 94) displays activity between the device and the network. The page contains four tabs:
ICSP, Blink, IP, and Wireless. in proportions of ICSP messages, blink messages, and Ethernet versus wireless use.
Panel Statistics - ICSP
The ICSP tab collects the number of ICSP messages received by the device.
FIG. 94 Panel Statistics - ICSP Tab
The features on this tab include:
Panel Statistics - ICSP Tab
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Total:
Received:
Lists the number of ICSP messages received since the last time the page was
cleared.
Processed:
Lists the number of ICSP messages processed since the last time the page
was cleared.
Dropped:
Lists the number of ICSP messages dropped since the last time the page was
cleared.
Last 15 minutes:
88
Received:
Lists the number of ICSP messages received within the previous 15 minutes.
Processed:
Lists the number of ICSP messages processed within the previous 15 minutes.
Dropped:
Lists the number of ICSP messages dropped within the previous 15 minutes.
Clear:
Clears all fields on the ICSP tab.
Refresh:
Refreshes all data on the ICSP tab.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
Panel Statistics - Blinks Tab
The Blinks tab (FIG. 95) collects the number of blink messages received by the device.
FIG. 95 Panel Statistics - Blinks Tab
Features on this tab include:
Panel Statistics - Blinks Tab
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Total:
Received:
Lists the number of blink messages received since the last time the page was
cleared.
Missed:
Lists the number of blink messages missed since the last time the page was
cleared.
Last 15 Minutes:
Received:
Lists the number of blink messages missed within the last 15 minutes.
Missed:
Lists the number of blink messages missed within the last 15 minutes.
Clear:
Clears all fields on the Blinks tab.
Refresh:
Refreshes all data on the Blinks tab.
Panel Statistics - IP Tab
The IP tab (FIG. 96) displays received and transmitted IP packets. Touch the Refresh button to refresh the page with its
current values.
FIG. 96 Panel Statistics - IP Tab
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
89
Protected Setup Pages
Panel Statistics - Wireless Tab
The Wireless tab (FIG. 96) displays the MVP-9000i’s wireless access statistics, including the wireless mode, the
frequency used, and the latest used access point. Touch the Refresh button to return the counters to their placement
before the latest update.
FIG. 97 Panel Statistics - Wireless Tab
Connection Utility Page
The Connection Utility page (FIG. 98) displays the current wired and wireless connection information, including the
latest link quality and signal strength information.
FIG. 98 Connection Utility Page
Connection Utility Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Protected Setup page provides a
constant visual indication of current connection status.
Note: a Lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Master IP:
90
The IP address for the network’s Master.
Wired IP:
The IP address used by the device for wired connections.
Wireless IP:
The IP address used by the device for wireless connections.
WAP MAC:
The AP’s MAC address.
SSID:
Displays the currently used SSID of the target AP.
Channel:
The channel being used for the current connection.
Signal Level Value:
Displays the current value of the target AP signal.
Signal Level:
Displays the current strength of the target AP signal.
Messages Sent:
Lists the number of queries sent to the AP.
Responses Received:
Lists the number of responses received from the AP.
Responses Missed:
Lists the number of responses missed by the AP.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Protected Setup Pages
SIP Settings Page
The options on the SIP Settings page (FIG. 99) enable you to establish network settings for using your touch panel as an
IP phone. With a CSG SIP Communications Gateway (FG2182-01, -02, -03), you can use your touch panel to make and
receive local, long distance, and international phone calls, and have access to phone features like call waiting, caller ID,
call forwarding, call queuing, and voice mail. Setting up your touch panel as a telephone requires that you set it up as one
in the CSG SIP Communications Gateway. Refer to the CSG SIP Communications Gateway Operation/Reference Guide
for information on setting up your touch panel to work as a telephone.
FIG. 99 SIP Settings page
You may need to load a Duet module to enable the touch panel to receive SIP calls. The Duet module translates between
the standard interface and the device protocol. It parses the buffer for responses from the device, sends strings to control
the device, and receives commands from the UI module or telnet sessions. Refer to the documentation supplied with the
Duet Module for more details.
A sample UI module is provided in the module package. It is not intended to cover
every possible application, but can be expanded as needed by a dealer to meet the
requirements of a particular installation.
Features on this page include:
SIP Settings Page
Back:
Saves all changes and returns to the previous page.
WiFi/Wired icon:
The icon to the left of the Connection Status Icon displays whether the current
connection to the Master is Wireless (image of a radio antenna) or Wired
(image of three networked computers).
Connection Status icon:
The icon in the upper-right corner of each Setup page shows online/offline state
of the panel to the master.
• Bright red - disconnected
• Bright green - connected. Blinks when a blink message is received to dark
green every 5 seconds for half a second then go back to bright green.
• Bright yellow - panel missed a blink message from the master. It will remain
yellow for 3 missed blink messages and then turn red. It will return to green
when a blink message is received.
Note: A lock appears on the icon if the panel is connected to a secured NetLinx
Master.
Enable:
This option enables the SIP Stack on startup. If you disable this option, the
panel will not attempt to read the rest of the configuration and will not register
with a proxy server. However, point-to-point SIP will still be enabled allowing for
existing intercom functionality.
Status:
This option displays whether you are connected to the proxy server.
Gateway Address:
This option enables you to enter the IP address or DNS name of the proxy
server that you want to use to register.
Port Number:
The option displays the port you use to connect to the proxy server. The
standard SIP port is 5060, but some providers use different ports.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
91
Protected Setup Pages
SIP Settings Page (Cont.)
92
STUN Address:
This option enables you to enter the IP address or DNS name of the Simple
Traversal of UDP through NATs (STUN) server. This field is optional.
Local Domain:
This is the realm used for authentication. This field is optional.
User Name:
This option enables you to enter the user name used for authentication to the
proxy server. Normally, the user name is the same as the phone number
assigned to the extension you are using. This field is optional.
Password:
This option enables you to enter the password for the user at the proxy server.
This field is optional.
Cancel/Save:
Touch the Cancel button to return to the Protected Setup page without saving
any changes made on the SIP Settings page. Touch the Save button to save
the changes and return to the Protected Setup page.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Upgrading Firmware
Upgrading Firmware
Overview
Programming the MVP-9000i requires the use of the latest versions of NetLinx Studio
and TPDesign 4, both available from www.amx.com.
The MVP-9000i uses a native RNDIS USB driver for USB-over-Ethernet communication. When the device is connected
to the downloading computer (see instructions below for more details), it creates a new LAN connection, and the user
will need to supply a static IP address for this to be enabled. To enter a static IP address, the user must edit the properties
of the TCP/IP interface of the connection itself. This driver is included in the installation of the latest version of NetLinx
Studio, available from www.amx.com.
Upgrading Firmware via USB stick or MicroSD card
Firmware and TPDesign 4 file downloads may be made via microSD card, using the microSD port on the left side of the
device, or they may be made via USB stick. The MVP-9000i uses the CC-MINIUSB Mini USB to PC Cable Adapter
(FG5967-20) for programming, firmware updates, and touch panel file transfer between a PC and the target device
(FIG. 100). If a programming cable is not available, it may be purchased from www.amx.com. The Mini-USB port for
the connector is located on the left side of the device as viewed from the front.
FIG. 100 CC-MINIUSB MiniUSB to PC Cable Adapter
To upgrade the firmware on the MVP-9000i to the latest version:
1. Download the latest MVP-9000i firmware from www.amx.com and save it to a microSD card or USB stick.
The firmware must be in a directory called “MVP-9000i,” saved at the root of the
microSD card or USB stick directory, to be recognized by the touch panel.
2. If using a USB stick for uploading, connect the male plug of CC-MINIUSB Cable Adapter to the mini-USB port on
the MVP-9000i, and then connect the USB stick to the female USB port. If using a microSD card, insert the card
into the slot on the left of the device.
3. Turn on the MVP-9000i and allow it to boot up. For best results, connect the panel to its power source or place it in
a Table or Wall Docking Station.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
93
Upgrading Firmware
4. If the panel boots up and detects a KIT file in the “MVP-9000i” directory on the microSD card or USB stick, the
panel will request that you press the screen to upgrade or wait to continue booting (FIG. 101). Touch the screen to
start the firmware update process.
FIG. 101 “Firmware upgrade file detected” notice screen
5. If you do not touch the screen to initiate a firmware update within 5 seconds, the touch panel will continue to reboot
(FIG. 102).
FIG. 102 “Firmware upgrade not initiated” notice screen
6. If you touched the screen to upgrade firmware, the Upgrade In Progress splash screen will appear (FIG. 103).
FIG. 103 “Upgrade in Progress” splash screen
7. If the panel does not detect the KIT file in the directory, access the Setup Pages (page 43), go to the Protected
Settings page (page 59), and access the System & Panel Options page (page 60). If the panel detects the appropriate
KIT file, either or both of the Install Firmware or Install Pages buttons will be enabled. Press either to go through
the automatic upload procedure.
94
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Upgrading Firmware
Upgrading from Previous Firmware
The MVP-9000i allows the option to revert the device to the previous firmware run before an upgrade. To upgrade the
device from previously loaded firmware:
1. From the Protected Setup page, press the Options button to open the System & Panel Options page.
2. In the System Options section, press the Install Firmware button.
3. In the Firmware Installation popup window (FIG. 71), press the Previous button.
4. The Confirmation Dialog box (FIG. 104) will ask “Are you sure you want to install the following firmware?” The
option to choose Yes will be enabled after five seconds. Press Yes to load the firmware listed, and No to return to the
Firmware Installation popup window.
FIG. 104 Previous Firmware installation confirmation dialog box
5. If you choose Yes, the device will retrieve the files and then reboot (FIG. 105).
FIG. 105 Upgrading from Previous Firmware System Message
Upgrading Firmware Via NetLinx Studio
The MVP-9000i uses a 5-pin CC-USB (Type A) to Mini-B 5-Wire programming cable (FG10-5965) for programming,
firmware updates, and touch panel file transfer between a PC and the target device. If a programming cable is not
available, it may be purchased from www.amx.com. The Mini-USB port for the connector is located on the left side of
the device as viewed from the front.
Before beginning with this section, verify that the device is powered and the Type-A end of the USB connector is
inserted and secure in the PC’s USB port. The panel must be powered On before connecting the mini-USB connector
to the panel. To guarantee that the upgrade is not interrupted by power loss, connecting the device to a power source,
such as inserting it into a Table Docking Station, before beginning the upgrade is highly recommended.
If the MVP-9000i battery is at less than a 30 percent charge, the firmware upload will
automatically fail. For best results, before uploading the firmware, connect the panel
to its power source or place it in a Table or Wall Docking Station.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
95
Upgrading Firmware
Establishing a USB connection between the PC and the panel, prior to installing the
USB Driver, will cause a failure in the USB driver installation.
1. Launch NetLinx Studio 2.x and select Settings > Master Communication Settings from the Main menu to open
the Master Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 106). If this is the first time the device needs to be configured,
refer to the Configuring Modero Firmware via the USB Port section on page 186.
FIG. 106 Master Communications Settings dialog box
2. Click the Communications Settings... button to open the Communications Settings dialog box (FIG. 107).
FIG. 107 Communications Settings dialog box
3. Click on the NetLinx Master radio button from the Platform Selection section.
4. Click on the Virtual Master radio box from the Transport Connection Option section to configure the PC to
communicate directly with a panel. Everything else, such as the Authentication, is greyed
5. -out because this connection is not going through the Master’s UI.
6. Click the Edit Settings button on the Communications Settings dialog to open the Virtual NetLinx Master Settings
dialog (FIG. 108).
FIG. 108 Virtual NetLinx Master Settings
7. Within this dialog, enter the Master System number. The default is 1.
8. In the Available Connections section, click on the IP address for the touch panel to select it.
96
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Upgrading Firmware
9. In the Virtual NetLinx Master Settings dialog box, click OK to close the box.
10. In the Communications Settings dialog box, click OK to close the box.
11. In the Master Communications Settings dialog box, click OK to save your settings and return to the main NetLinx
Studio application.
12. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System. The default System
value is 1.
13. Right-click on the Empty Device Tree/System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate the list.
The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number, in the Online
Tree tab, until both the system number used in step 14 for the Virtual NetLinx Master
is entered into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page and the
panel is restarted.
14. The OnLine Tree should now display the connection to the device. The Connection Status Icon on the device may
take up to five seconds to register the connection.
Step 3: Confirm and Upgrade the firmware via the USB port
Use the CC-USB Type-A to Mini-B 5-wire programming cable to provide communication between the mini-USB
Program port on the touch panel and the PC. This method of communication is used to transfer firmware Kit files and
TPD4 touch panel files.
A mini-USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active panel.
1. Verify that the direct USB connection (Type-A on the panel to mini-USB on the panel) is configured properly, using
the steps outlined in the previous two sections.
2. With the panel already configured for USB communication and the Virtual Master setup within NetLinx Studio,
refresh the Online Tree pane.
3. After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the Virtual Master and
the panel, click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window (FIG. 109) to view the devices on the Virtual
System. The default System value is 1.
4. Right-click on the System entry (FIG. 109) and select Refresh System to re-populate the list. Verify the panel
appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window.
Virtual Master firmware
version and device number
MVP panel firmware version
and device number
FIG. 109 NetLinx Workspace window (showing panel connection via a Virtual NetLinx Master)
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
97
Upgrading Firmware
The panel-specific firmware is shown on the right of the listed panel.
Download the latest firmware file from www.amx.com and then save the Kit file to
your computer. Note that each Kit file is intended for download to its corresponding
panel. In some cases, several Kit files may be included in a .zip file; extract the .zip
file to access the required Kit file.
5. If the panel firmware version is not the latest available; locate the latest firmware file from the www.amx.com >
Tech Center > Firmware Files > Modero Panels section of the website.
6. Click on the desired Kit file link and after accepting the Licensing Agreement, verify download of the Modero Kit
file to a known location.
7. Select Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to NetLinx Device from the main menu to open the Send to NetLinx
Device dialog (FIG. 110). Verify that the panel’s System and Device number values match those values listed within
the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window.
FIG. 110 Send to NetLinx Device dialog window
8. Select the appropriate Kit file from within the Browse for Folder window (FIG. 111).
FIG. 111 Browse for Folder window
9. Select the panel’s Kit file from the Files section.
10. Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the Master (listed in the
OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window). The Port field is greyed-out.
11. Click the Reboot Device checkbox if it is not already checked. This causes the touch panel to reboot after the
firmware update process is complete.
12. Click Send to begin the transfer. The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom-right of the dialog.
13. After the file transfer is complete, the panel will automatically reboot. As the panel is rebooting, temporarily unplug
the USB connector on the panel until the panel has completely restarted.
14. Once the first panel page has been displayed, reconnect the USB connector to the panel.
15. Right-click the associated System number and select Refresh System. This causes a refresh of all project systems,
establishes a new connection to the Master, and populates the System list with devices on your particular system.
16. Confirm that the panel has been properly updated to the correct firmware version.
Verify you have downloaded the latest firmware file from www.amx.com and then
save the Kit file to your computer.
98
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Upgrading Firmware
A Special Note for Network Interface Connections
Due to any USB connection to your PC being made through a Network Interface Connection (NIC), Windows will
automatically make any new NIC connection the Primary connection. If this happens, the USB address of 12.0.0.x will
show up across the PC’s network switches as the PC’s source address. In some cases, network administrators will notice
the NIC connection and reconfigure any PC that has connected to the MVP-9000i. Business, college, and government
installations are the type of installations that would be most affected, and most home installations would not be affected.
To prevent the NIC connection from becoming the primary connection:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel to open the Control Panel window.
2. In the Control Panel window, click on the Network Connections icon to open the Network Connections window
(FIG. 112)
FIG. 112 Network Connections window
3. From the Advanced menu, select Advanced Settings... to open the Advanced Settings window (FIG. 113).
FIG. 113 Advanced Settings window
4. Under the Adapters And Bindings tab, the user needs to make sure the Local Area Connection is not at the top of the
Connections list. If it is at the top of the list (FIG. 113), select it and use the down arrow to the right of the list to
move it to the bottom of the list (FIG. 114).
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
99
Upgrading Firmware
FIG. 114 Moving the Local Area Connection
5. In the lower Bindings for Local Area Connection field, unselect ALL bindings by clicking on the checkboxes by
each binding to remove the checks from each box (FIG. 115).
FIG. 115 Bindings for Local area list detail
6. When finished, click OK to close the Advanced Settings window and save all changes.
100
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Upgrading Firmware
Reverting the MVP-9000i to Factory Default Firmware
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary to return the MVP-9000i to its original factory firmware and settings. To do
so, the procedure may be started either from the touch screen during rebooting, or by accessing the Protected Setup
pages.
To revert the MVP-9000i to factory default settings via a reboot:
1. Reboot the device, either from the Setup page (page 43) or via the Reset button on the left side of the device
(FIG. 2). Touch and hold the touch panel while the device is rebooting, until the “Request for Factory Reset”
confirmation screen (FIG. 116) appears. The Status LED on the right front of the device (FIG. 1) will also change
color from blue to red.
FIG. 116 “Request for factory reset detected” confirmation screen
2. Release the touch screen to start the factory reset. The factory reset confirmation screen appears, warning that
continuing with the reset will result in a loss of data (FIG. 117), and the red Status LED will blink on and off. Press
Yes within 10 seconds to continue with the factory reset, or No to continue the reboot with the current settings and
firmware.
If neither button is pressed within 10 seconds, the Status LED will change back from
red to blue and the reboot will continue.
Returning the MVP-9000i to its factory defaults will remove all previous configuration
settings and user pages.
FIG. 117 Factory reset confirmation screen
3. The MVP-9000i will now reload its factory default settings and firmware and then reboot.
To revert the MVP-9000i to factory default settings via the Protected Setup pages:
1. From the Protected Setup page, press the Options button to open the System & Panel Options page (page 60).
2. In the System Options section, press the Install Firmware button.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
101
Upgrading Firmware
3. In the Firmware Installation popup window, press the Factory button.
4. The Confirmation Dialog box (FIG. 118) will ask “Are you sure you want to install the following firmware?” The
option to choose Yes will be enabled after five seconds. Press Yes to load the firmware listed, and No to return to the
Firmware Installation popup window.
FIG. 118 Factory Firmware reset confirmation dialog box
5. If you choose Yes, the device will retrieve the files and then reboot (FIG. 119).
FIG. 119 Factory Firmware Reset system message
102
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Programming
Overview
You can program the MVP-9000i, using the commands in this section, to perform a wide variety of operations using
Send Commands and variable text commands.
A device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with values for the Device: Port: System (in
all programming examples - Panel is used in place of these values and represents all Modero panels).
Verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master and Modero firmware, as well as the
latest version of NetLinx Studio and TPD4.
Animated Transitions
Animated transitions are used to add motion and effects to the transition from one page to another on a panel. With
existing panel firmware, page flip transitions occur with the new page immediately drawing over the existing page on the
screen. With animated transitions, the old page is moved, faded, or overdrawn from the screen while the new page is
drawn. These operations use the OpenGL hardware accelerator to ensure smooth transitions.
Current panel firmware also supports animated buttons and popup page effects. This functionality is unchanged.
In all cases, once the transition is triggered, the old page is frozen. For example, if the old page had an animated button,
the motion on that button would stop as soon as the transition is triggered. If there is motion on the new page such as an
animated button or even a popup effect, this motion will operate even while the overall page itself is in motion as part of
the transition.
Seven different classes of transitions are supported. Each transition class is described below. All of the transition classes,
with the exception of Page Curl, are commanded transitions. Once the transition is triggered, it proceeds to completion.
Page Curl can be interrupted and directed by the person touching the LCD as described below.
Transition Classes
Slide
The current page slides off of the screen and the new page slides in until it completely
covers the screen and stops. There is no gap between pages, so if the page
backgrounds match, this effect can give the appearance of moving around on a canvas
that is larger than the physical screen size.
Slide with
bounce
This is the same as a slide transition, but with a bounce effect added when the new page
reaches the edge of the screen across from where it originated.
Black glass
The existing page appears to move away from the viewer and off to the side. As soon as
it is completely off the screen, the new page moves in and toward the viewer from the
opposite edge of the screen. Both the old and new pages have a reflection on the bottom
that makes it appear that the page is sliding along black reflective glass.
Fade
The current page fades out while the new page fades in.
Page curl
The existing page appears to be peeled away like a sheet of paper, revealing the new
page underneath. The new page has a shadow effect, and a faint reversed impression of
the old page can be seen through the back of the paper being flipped. This transition can
be interrupted by the user by holding a finger on the LCD and moving it around. The
corner of the paper will follow the user's finger until released, causing the transition to
proceed to completion. For the best effect, the button that triggers the page curl effect
should be placed near the corner of the screen from which the page curl will originate.
Door with fade
The new page moves over the existing page like a door with a hinge at the edge of the
LCD. In addition, the new page is semi-transparent, allowing the old page to be seen
through until the transition is finished, at which point the old page has faded away.
Center door with
fade
This transition operates as above, except that the hinge point is at the center of the LCD
rather than the edge.
The origin of the transition is the point on the LCD where the motion originates. In most cases, these locations are the
top, bottom, left and right of the screen. For example, a slide transition with a left origin will appear to slide in from the
left towards the right of the screen.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
103
Programming
Slide, slide with bounce, door with fade and center door with fade can originate from the top, bottom, left and right sides
of the screen. Black glass can originate from the left or right. Fade does not need an origin since the entire screen fades
together. Page curl originates from the four corners of the screen: upper left, lower left, upper right and lower right.
The transition time is the amount of time required for the transition to operate from start to finish. This value can be
specified from 0.3 seconds to 3.0 seconds in tenths of a second. If not specified, the default is 1.5 seconds.
Transition times are based on real world clock time and do not vary based on the speed of the processor or the frame rate
at which the display system is running.
Since the transitions require OpenGL hardware acceleration, they are not seen by the user on a VNC connection. When a
transition is triggered, the user will see a normal page flip to the new page on the VNC connection, while the animated
transition occurs as expected on the panel.
Transition Commands
^AFP
Flips to a page
with the specified
page name using
an animated
transition.
Flips to a page with the specified page name using an animated transition. If the page is
active, do not redraw the current page. If the page name is blank, flips to the previous
page.
Syntax: "'^AFP-<page name>,<animation>,<origin>,<time>'"
Animation is one of the following strings: slide, sldBounce, blkGlass, fade, pgCurl,
doorFade, cntrDrFade
If animation is blank or invalid, the page flip will occur without any animated transition
occurring.
Origin is a number representing one of the following values for where
the animated transition originates on the screen:
1 - center (currently unused)
2 - top
3 - bottom
4 - left
5 - right
6 - lower left
7 - lower right
8 - upper left
9 - upper right
If the origin is blank or invalid, the default is 5 (right).
Time is the transition time in tenths of a second which can vary from 3 (0.3 seconds) to 30
(3.0 seconds). Values above or below these values will be clamped. If the time is blank,
then the default is 1.5 seconds.
Example:
"'^AFP-MAIN,slide,5,10'"
Will transition to a page named MAIN using a slide effect from the right to the left and
taking 1 second to complete.
Touch Gesture Recognition
Gesturing refers to the act of moving a finger or stylus across the overlay and having the panel recognize and process this
motion as a gesture.
Once a gesture is detected, it is processed as another external button on the panel. This enables the user to design pages
that translate gesture operations into any functionality available to external buttons. In addition, a gesture velocity is
calculated and transmitted to the master along with the gesture type itself in a custom event message. Nothing will be
processed if the external button associated with this gesture has no page flip operations programmed, is disabled, or has
no values programmed for address, channel, level, string output or command output. The custom event, however, is
always transmitted.
The following seven gesture types are supported:
1. Swipe up
2. Swipe down
3. Swipe right
4. Swipe left
104
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
5. Clockwise circle
6. Counter-clockwise circle
7. Double-Tap
Gesture Velocity
A gesture “velocity” is calculated to represent the speed of the gesture. This is done by measuring the time from when
the user first presses the screen until the user releases. The following simplified velocities are supported and transferred
to the master in the custom event message:
1. Fast
2. Normal
3. Slow
A precise velocity is sent in the custom event message which represents the velocity in terms of pixels per second for
slides and circles. For a double tap, this value is the total time in milliseconds from the first press to the second release.
Gesture Prioritization
It is important to prioritize the operation of the presses, moves and releases of the user to avoid confusion over what the
user intended. The following process is used to determine what the user meant whenever a gesture operation is defined
globally or for this page.
Gesture Prioritization
The user presses outside of a button or
slider and moves before releasing.
The firmware will always try to recognize a gesture as long as the
user moves at least 20 pixels before the release occurs.
The user presses inside of a slider and
moves before releasing.
This will always be processed as a slider operation and no attempt
will be made to recognize a gesture.
The user presses inside of a joystick
button and moves before releasing.
This will always be processed as a joystick operation and no
attempt will be made to recognize a gesture.
The user moves a movable popup page. This will always be processed as a popup page move and not a
gesture.
The user presses on a button and then
moves.
In this case, the press will not be sent for the first 0.15 second. If
the user has moved at least 60 pixels by this time, then a button
press/release will not be processed, but this will be processed as a
gesture. At 0.15 second, the button press is processed and once
the user releases, the release is processed and no gesture
recognition is attempted. To be clear, it is not necessary for the
user to move off of a button to be considered a gesture, but to
move at least 60 pixels in that first 0.15 of a second.
The user double taps on a button or
slider.
This will not be recognized as a gesture. This would be considered
two quick press/release operations on the button or slider.
The user double taps outside of a button
or slider.
This will be registered as a gesture.
Gesture VNC/Mouse Support
Gestures are recognized whether or not the user is using a finger or stylus on the panel's screen overlay, a mouse on a
VNC connection, or a mouse connected to the local USB port on the panel.
Gesture Custom Event
Whenever a gesture is recognized and processed a custom event is also sent to the master. The following values describe
this event:
CUSTOM_EVENT ADDRESS is 1
CUSTOM_EVENT EVENTID is 600
Custom.Value1 is the gesture number
Custom.Value2 is the simplified gesture velocity
Custom.Value3 is the precise gesture velocity
Gesture numbers are:
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
105
Programming
1. Swipe up
2. Swipe down
3. Swipe right
4. Swipe left
5. Clockwise circle
6. Counter-clockwise circle
7. Double-Tap
Simplified gesture velocity values are:
1. Fast
2. Normal
3. Slow
Precise gesture velocity:
1. For slides and circles this represents pixels per second.
2. For double taps, this is the time in milliseconds from the first press to the second release.
Enabling or Disabling the Gesture Custom Event
By default, a gesture custom event is sent to the master each time that a gesture is recognized. A send command has been
added to allow disabling and re-enabling of this capability.
The value sent is not retained and gesture custom events will be enabled each time
the panel restarts.
Gesture Custom Event Commands
^GCE
Sets whether or
not the panel
sends a custom
event to the
master whenever
a gesture is
detected.
106
For panels supporting gestures. Sets whether or not the panel sends a custom event to
the master whenever a gesture is detected.
Syntax:
"'^GCE-ON'" or "'^GCE-OFF'"
NOTE: This setting is not retained and the default is to always send the events. To enable
sending the event, the value after the dash can be "on", "ON", or “1”. Anything else will
disable sending custom events.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Page Commands
These Page Commands are used in NetLinx Programming Language and are case insensitive.
Page Commands
@APG
Add a specific
popup page to a
specified popup
group.
Add the popup page to a group if it does not already exist. If the new popup is added to a
group which has a popup displayed on the current page along with the new pop-up, the
displayed popup will be hidden and the new popup will be displayed.
Syntax:
"'@APG-<popup page name>;<popup group name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@APG-Popup1;Group1'"
Adds the popup page ’Popup1’ to the popup group ’Group1’.
@CPG
Clear all popup
pages from
specified popup
group.
Syntax:
"'@CPG-<popup group name>'"
Variable:
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@CPG-Group1'"
Clears all popup pages from the popup group ’Group1’.
@DPG
Delete a specific
popup page from
specified popup
group if it exists.
Syntax:
"'@DPG-<popup page name>;<popup group name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@DPG-Popup1;Group1'"
Deletes the popup page ’Popup1’ from the popup group ’Group1’.
@PDR
If the flag is set, the popup will return to its default location on show instead of its last drag
location.
Set the popup
location reset flag. Syntax:
"'@PDR-<popup page name>;<reset flag>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
On.
reset flag = 1 = Enable reset flag
0 = Disable reset flag
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PDR-Popup1;1'"
Popup1 will return to its default location when turned On.
@PHE
Syntax:
"'@PHE-<popup page name>;<hide effect name>'"
Set the hide effect
for the specified
Variable:
popup page to the
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
named hide effect. On.
hide effect name = Refers to the popup effect names being used.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHE-Popup1;Slide to Left'"
Sets the Popup1 hide effect name to ’Slide to Left’.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
107
Programming
Page Commands (Cont.)
@PHP
Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect; however, the command will specify both.
Set the hide effect This command sets the location at which the effect will end at.
Syntax:
position.
"'@PHP-<popup page name>;<x coordinate>,<y coordinate>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHP-Popup1;75,0'"
Sets the Popup1 hide effect x-coordinate value to 75 and the y-coordinate value to 0.
@PHT
Syntax:
"'@PHT-<popup page name>;<hide effect time>'"
Set the hide effect
time for the
Variable:
specified popup
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
page.
On.
hide effect time = Given in 1/10ths of a second.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHT-Popup1;50'"
Sets the Popup1 hide effect time to 5 seconds.
@PPA
Close all popups
on a specified
page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used. Same as the ’Clear Page’ command
in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'@PPA-<page name>'"
Variable:
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPA-Page1'"
Close all pop-ups on Page1.
@PPF
Deactivate a
specific popup
page on either a
specified page or
the current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as
the ’Hide Popup’ command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'@PPF-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPF-Popup1;Main'"
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPF-Popup1'"
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.
108
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Page Commands (Cont.)
@PPG
Toggle a
specific popup
page on either a
specified page or
the current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). Toggling refers to the
activating/deactivating (On/Off) of a popup page. This command works in the same way
as the ’Toggle Popup’ command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'@PPG-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPG-Popup1;Main'"
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the ’Main’ page from one state to another (On/Off).
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPG-Popup1'"
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page from one state to another (On/Off).
@PPK
Kill a specific
popup page from
all pages.
Kill refers to the deactivating (Off) of a popup window from all pages. If the pop-up page is
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as
the 'Clear Group' command in TPDesign 4.
Syntax:
"'@PPK-<popup page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPK-Popup1'"
Kills the popup page ’Popup1’ on all pages.
@PPM
Set the modality
of a specific
popup page to
Modal or
NonModal.
A Modal popup page, when active, only allows you to use the buttons and features on that
popup page. All other buttons on the panel page are inactivated.
Syntax:
"'@PPM-<popup page name>;<mode>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
mode = NONMODAL converts a previously Modal popup page to a NonModal.
MODAL converts a previously NonModal popup page to Modal.
modal = 1 and non-modal = 0
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPM-Popup1;Modal'"
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to Modal.
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPM-Popup1;1'"
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to Modal.
@PPN
Activate a
specific popup
page to launch on
either a specified
page or the
current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is
already on, do not re-draw it. This command works in the same way as the ’Show Popup’
command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'@PPN-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPN-Popup1;Main'"
Activates ’Popup1’ on the ’Main’ page.
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPN-Popup1'"
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
109
Programming
Page Commands (Cont.)
@PPT
If timeout is empty, popup page will clear the timeout.
Set a specific
popup page to
timeout within a
specified time.
Syntax:
"'@PPT-<popup page name>;<timeout>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
timeout = Timeout duration in 1/10ths of a second.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPT-Popup1;30'"
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to timeout within 3 seconds.
@PPX
This command works in the same way as the 'Clear All' command in TPDesign 4.
Close all
popups on all
pages.
Syntax:
"'@PPX'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPX'"
Close all popups on all pages.
@PSE
Set the show
effect for the
specified popup
page to the
named show
effect.
Syntax:
"'@PSE-<popup page name>;<show effect name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
On.
show effect name = Refers to the popup effect name being used.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PSE-Popup1;Slide from Left'"
Sets the Popup1 show effect name to ’Slide from Left’.
@PSP
Set the show
effect position.
Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect; however, the command will specify both.
This command sets the location at which the effect will begin.
Syntax:
"'@PSP-<popup page name>;<x coordinate>,<y coordinate>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PSP-Popup1;100,0'"
Sets the Popup1 show effect x-coordinate value to 100 and the y-coordinate value to 0.
@PST
Set the show
effect time for the
specified popup
page.
Syntax:
"'@PST-<popup page name>;<show effect time>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed
On.
show effect time = Given in 1/10ths of a second.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PST-Popup1;50'"
Sets the Popup1 show effect time to 5 seconds.
PAGE
Flip to a specified
page.
Flips to a page with a specified page name. If the page is currently active, it will not redraw
the page.
Syntax:
"'PAGE-<page name>'"
Variable:
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PAGE-Page1'"
Flips to page1.
110
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Page Commands (Cont.)
PPOF
Deactivate a
specific popup
page on either a
specified page or
the current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as
the ’Hide Popup’ command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'PPOF-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOF-Popup1;Main'"
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page.
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOF-Popup1'"
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.
PPOG
Toggle a
specific popup
page on either a
specified page or
the current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). Toggling refers to the
activating/deactivating (On/Off) of a popup page. This command works in the same way
as the ’Toggle Popup’ command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'PPOG-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOG-Popup1;Main'"
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page from one state to another (On/Off).
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOG-Popup1'"
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page from one state to another (On/Off).
PPON
Activate a
specific popup
page to launch on
either a specified
page or the
current page.
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is
already On, do not re-draw it. This command works in the same way as the ’Show Popup’
command in TPDesign4.
Syntax:
"'PPON-<popup page name>;<page name>'"
Variable:
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPON-Popup1; Main'"
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page.
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPON-Popup1'"
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
111
Programming
Programming Numbers
The following information provides the programming numbers for colors, fonts, and borders.
Colors can be used to set the colors on buttons, sliders, and pages. The lowest color number represents the lightest colorspecific display; the highest number represents the darkest display. For example, 0 represents light red, and 5 is dark red.
RGB Triplets and Names For Basic 88 Colors
RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors
Index No.
112
Red
Green
00
Name
Very Light Red
255
0
Blue
0
01
Light Red
223
0
0
02
Red
191
0
0
03
Medium Red
159
0
0
04
Dark Red
127
0
0
05
Very Dark Red
95
0
0
06
Very Light Orange
255
128
0
07
Light Orange
223
112
0
08
Orange
191
96
0
09
Medium Orange
159
80
0
10
Dark Orange
127
64
0
11
Very Dark Orange
95
48
0
12
Very Light Yellow
255
255
0
13
Light Yellow
223
223
0
14
Yellow
191
191
0
15
Medium Yellow
159
159
0
16
Dark Yellow
127
127
0
17
Very Dark Yellow
95
95
0
18
Very Light Lime
128
255
0
19
Light Lime
112
223
0
20
Lime
96
191
0
21
Medium Lime
80
159
0
22
Dark Lime
64
127
0
23
Very Dark Lime
48
95
0
24
Very Light Green
0
255
0
25
Light Green
0
223
0
26
Green
0
191
0
27
Medium Green
0
159
0
28
Dark Green
0
127
0
29
Very Dark Green
0
95
0
30
Very Light Mint
0
255
128
31
Light Mint
0
223
112
32
Mint
0
191
96
33
Medium Mint
0
159
80
34
Dark Mint
0
127
64
35
Very Dark Mint
0
95
48
36
Very Light Cyan
0
255
255
37
Light Cyan
0
223
223
38
Cyan
0
191
191
39
Medium Cyan
0
159
159
40
Dark Cyan
0
127
127
41
Very Dark Cyan
0
95
95
42
Very Light Aqua
0
128
255
43
Light Aqua
0
112
223
44
Aqua
0
96
191
45
Medium Aqua
0
80
159
46
Dark Aqua
0
64
127
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors (Cont.)
Index No.
Red
Green
47
Name
Very Dark Aqua
0
48
Blue
95
48
Very Light Blue
0
0
255
49
Light Blue
0
0
223
50
Blue
0
0
191
51
Medium Blue
0
0
159
52
Dark Blue
0
0
127
53
Very Dark Blue
0
0
95
54
Very Light Purple
128
0
255
55
Light Purple
112
0
223
56
Purple
96
0
191
57
Medium Purple
80
0
159
127
58
Dark Purple
64
0
59
Very Dark Purple
48
0
95
60
Very Light Magenta
255
0
255
61
Light Magenta
223
0
223
62
Magenta
191
0
191
63
Medium Magenta
159
0
159
64
Dark Magenta
127
0
127
65
Very Dark Magenta
95
0
95
66
Very Light Pink
255
0
128
67
Light Pink
223
0
112
68
Pink
191
0
96
69
Medium Pink
159
0
80
70
Dark Pink
127
0
64
71
Very Dark Pink
95
0
48
72
White
255
255
255
73
Grey1
238
238
238
74
Grey3
204
204
204
75
Grey5
170
170
170
76
Grey7
136
136
136
77
Grey9
102
102
102
78
Grey4
187
187
187
79
Grey6
153
153
153
80
Grey8
119
119
119
81
Grey10
85
85
85
82
Grey12
51
51
51
83
Grey13
34
34
34
84
Grey2
221
221
221
85
Grey11
68
68
68
86
Grey14
17
17
17
87
Black
0
0
0
255
TRANSPARENT
99
53
99
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
113
Programming
Font Styles And ID Numbers
Font styles can be used to program the text fonts on buttons, sliders, and pages. The following chart shows the default
font type and their respective ID numbers generated by TPDesign4.
Default Font Styles and ID Numbers
Font ID #
Font type
Size
Font ID #
Font type
1
Courier New
9
19
Arial
Size
9
2
Courier New
12
20
Arial
10
3
Courier New
18
21
Arial
12
4
Courier New
26
22
Arial
14
5
Courier New
32
23
Arial
16
6
Courier New
18
24
Arial
18
7
Courier New
26
25
Arial
20
8
Courier New
34
26
Arial
24
9
AMX Bold
14
27
Arial
36
10
AMX Bold
20
28
Arial Bold
10
11
AMX Bold
36
29
Arial Bold
8
32 - Variable Fonts start at 32.
Fonts must be imported into a TPDesign4 project file. The font ID numbers are
assigned by TPDesign4. These values are also listed in the Generate
Programmer’s Report.
Border Styles And Programming Numbers
Border styles can be used to program borders on buttons, sliders, and popup pages.
Border Styles and Programming Numbers
No.
Border styles
No.
Border styles
0-1
No border
10-11
Picture frame
2
Single line
12
3
Double line
20
Bevel-S
4
Quad line
21
Bevel-M
5-6
Circle 15
22-23
Circle 15
7
Single line
24-27
Neon inactive-S
8
Double line
40-41
Diamond 55
9
Quad line
Double line
The TPDesign4 Touch Panel Design program has pre-set border styles that are user-selectable.
The following number values cannot be used for programming purposes when changing border styles. TPD4 border
styles may ONLY be changed by using the name.
TPD4 Border Styles by Name
114
No.
Border styles
No.
Border styles
1
None
27
Cursor Bottom
2
AMX Elite -L
28
Cursor Bottom with Hole
3
AMX Elite -M
29
Cursor Top
4
AMX Elite -S
30
Cursor Top with Hole
5
Bevel -L
31
Cursor Left
6
Bevel -M
32
Cursor Left with Hole
7
Bevel -S
33
Cursor Right
8
Circle 15
34
Cursor Right with Hole
9
Circle 25
35
Custom Frame
10
Circle 35
36
Diamond 15
11
Circle 45
37
Diamond 25
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
TPD4 Border Styles by Name (Cont.)
No.
Border styles
No.
Border styles
12
Circle 55
38
Diamond 35
13
Circle 65
39
Diamond 45
14
Circle 75
40
Diamond 55
15
Circle 85
41
Diamond 65
16
Circle 95
42
Diamond 75
17
Circle 105
43
Diamond 85
18
Circle 115
44
Diamond 95
19
Circle 125
45
Diamond 105
20
Circle 135
46
Diamond 115
21
Circle 145
47
Diamond 125
22
Circle 155
48
Diamond 135
23
Circle 165
49
Diamond 145
24
Circle 175
50
Diamond 155
25
Circle 185
51
Diamond 165
26
Circle 195
52
Diamond 175
53
Diamond 185
97
Menu Bottom Rounded 185
54
Diamond 195
98
Menu Bottom Rounded 195
55
Double Bevel -L
99
Menu Top Rounded 15
56
Double Bevel -M
100
Menu Top Rounded 25
57
Double Bevel -S
101
Menu Top Rounded 35
58
Double Line
102
Menu Top Rounded 45
59
Fuzzy
103
Menu Top Rounded 55
60
Glow-L
104
Menu Top Rounded 65
61
Glow-S
105
Menu Top Rounded 75
62
Help Down
106
Menu Top Rounded 85
63
Neon Active -L
107
Menu Top Rounded 95
64
Neon Active -S
108
Menu Top Rounded 105
65
Neon Inactive -L
109
Menu Top Rounded 115
66
Neon Inactive -S
110
Menu Top Rounded 125
67
Oval H 60x30
111
Menu Top Rounded 135
68
Oval H 100x50
112
Menu Top Rounded 145
69
Oval H 150x75
113
Menu Top Rounded 155
70
Oval H 200x100
114
Menu Top Rounded 165
71
Oval V 30x60
115
Menu Top Rounded 175
72
Oval V 50x100
116
Menu Top Rounded 185
73
Oval V 75x150
117
Menu Top Rounded 195
74
Oval V 100x200
118
Menu Right Rounded 15
75
Picture Frame
119
Menu Right Rounded 25
76
Quad Line
120
Menu Right Rounded 35
77
Single Line
121
Menu Right Rounded 45
78
Windows Style Popup
122
Menu Right Rounded 55
79
Windows Style Popup (Status Bar)
123
Menu Right Rounded 65
80
Menu Bottom Rounded 15
124
Menu Right Rounded 75
81
Menu Bottom Rounded 25
125
Menu Right Rounded 85
82
Menu Bottom Rounded 35
126
Menu Right Rounded 95
83
Menu Bottom Rounded 45
127
Menu Right Rounded 105
84
Menu Bottom Rounded 55
128
Menu Right Rounded 115
85
Menu Bottom Rounded 65
129
Menu Right Rounded 125
86
Menu Bottom Rounded 75
130
Menu Right Rounded 135
87
Menu Bottom Rounded 85
131
Menu Right Rounded 145
88
Menu Bottom Rounded 95
132
Menu Right Rounded 155
89
Menu Bottom Rounded 105
133
Menu Right Rounded 165
90
Menu Bottom Rounded 115
134
Menu Right Rounded 175
91
Menu Bottom Rounded 125
135
Menu Right Rounded 185
92
Menu Bottom Rounded 135
136
Menu Right Rounded 195
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
115
Programming
TPD4 Border Styles by Name (Cont.)
No.
Border styles
No.
Border styles
93
Menu Bottom Rounded 145
137
Menu Left Rounded 15
94
Menu Bottom Rounded 155
138
Menu Left Rounded 25
95
Menu Bottom Rounded 165
139
Menu Left Rounded 35
96
Menu Bottom Rounded 175
140
Menu Left Rounded 45
141
Menu Left Rounded 55
149
Menu Left Rounded 135
142
Menu Left Rounded 65
150
Menu Left Rounded 145
143
Menu Left Rounded 75
151
Menu Left Rounded 155
144
Menu Left Rounded 85
152
Menu Left Rounded 165
145
Menu Left Rounded 95
153
Menu Left Rounded 175
146
Menu Left Rounded 105
154
Menu Left Rounded 185
147
Menu Left Rounded 115
155
Menu Left Rounded 195
148
Menu Left Rounded 125
"^" Button Commands
These Button Commands are used in NetLinx Studio and are case insensitive.
All commands that begin with "^" have the capability of assigning a variable text address range and button state range. A
device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with values for the Device: Port: System (in all
programming examples - Panel is used in place of these values).
Variable text ranges allow you to target 1 or more variable text channels in a single command.
Button State ranges allow you to target 1 or more states of a variable text button with a single command.
 “.” Character is used for the 'through' notation, also the “&” character is used for the 'And' notation.
"^" Button Commands
^ANI
Syntax:
Run a button
animation
(in 1/10 second).
Variable:
"'^ANI-<vt addr range>,<start state>,<end state>,<time>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
start state = Beginning of button state (0= current state).
end state = End of button state.
time = In 1/10 second intervals.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ANI-500,1,25,100'"
Runs a button animation at text range 500 from state 1 to state 25 for 10 second.
^APF
Add page flip
action to a button
if it does not
already exist.
Syntax:
"'^APF-<vt addr range>,<page flip action>,<page name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
page flip action =
Stan[dardPage] - Flip to standard page
Prev[iousPage] - Flip to previous page
Show[Popup] - Show Popup page
Hide[Popup] - Hide Popup page
Togg[lePopup] - Toggle popup state
ClearG[roup] - Clear popup page group from all pages
ClearP[age] - Clear all popup pages from a page with the specified page name
ClearA[ll] - Clear all popup pages from all pages
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^APF-400,Stan,Main Page'"
Assigns a button to a standard page flip with page name 'Main Page'.
116
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BAT
Syntax:
Append
non-unicode text.
Variable:
"'^BAT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
new text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BAT-520,1,Enter City'"
Appends the text 'Enter City' to the button’s OFF state.
^BAU
Same format as ^UNI.
Append
unicode text.
Syntax:
"'^BAU-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<unicode text>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
unicode text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Unicode characters must be entered in Hex
format.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BAU-520,1,00770062'"
Appends Unicode text '00770062' to the button’s OFF state.
^BCB
Only if the specified border color is not the same as the current color.
Set the border
color to the
specified color.
Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).
Syntax:
"'^BCB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
color value = Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 112 for more
information.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCB-500.504&510,1,12'"
Sets the Off state border color to 12 (Yellow). Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).
Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 112.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
117
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BCF
Only if the specified fill color is not the same as the current color.
Set the fill color to
the specified
color.
Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).
Syntax:
"'^BCF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
color value = Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 112 for more
information.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND
SEND_COMMAND
SEND_COMMAND
SEND_COMMAND
Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,12'"
Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,Yellow'"
Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,#F4EC0A63''"
Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,#F4EC0A'"
Sets the Off state fill color by color number. Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).
^BCT
Only if the specified text color is not the same as the current color.
Set the text color
to the specified
color.
Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).
Syntax:
"'^BCT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
color value = Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 112 for more
information.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCT-500.504&510,1,12'"
Sets the Off state border color to 12 (Yellow). Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).
^BDO
Determines what order each layer of the button is drawn.
Set the button
draw order.
Syntax:
"'^BDO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<1-5><1-5><1-5><1-5><15>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
layer assignments =
Fill Layer
=1
Image Layer = 2
Icon Layer = 3
Text Layer = 4
Border Layer = 5
Note: The layer assignments are from bottom to top. The default draw order is 12345.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BDO-530,1&2,51432'"
Sets the button’s variable text 530 ON/OFF state draw order (from bottom to top) to
Border, Fill, Text, Icon, and Image.
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BDO-1,0,12345'"
Sets all states of a button back to its default drawing order.
118
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BFB
ONLY works on General-type buttons.
Set the feedback Syntax:
type of the button.
"'^BFB-<vt addr range>,<feedback type>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
feedback type = (None, Channel, Invert, On (Always on), Momentary, and Blink).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BFB-500,Momentary'"
Sets the Feedback type of the button to 'Momentary'.
^BIM
Syntax:
"'^BIM-<vt addr range>,<input mask>'"
Set the input
mask for the
Variable:
specified address.
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
input mask = Refer to the Text Area Input Masking table on page 170 for character
types.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BIM-500,AAAAAAAAAA'"
Sets the input mask to ten ’A’ characters, that are required, to either a letter or digit
(entry is required).
^BLN
Set the number of
lines removed
equally from the
top and bottom of
a composite video
signal.
The maximum number of lines to remove is 240. A value of 0 will display the incoming
video signal unaffected. This command is used to scale non 4x3 video images into non
4x3 video buttons.
Syntax:
"'^BLN-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<number of lines>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
number of lines = 0 - 240.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BLN-500,55'"
Equally removes 55 lines from the top and 55 lines from the bottom of the video button.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
119
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BMC
Button copy
command.
Copy attributes of
the source button
to all the
destination
buttons.
Note that the source is a single button state. Each state must be copied as a separate
command. The <codes> section represents what attributes will be copied. All codes are
2 char pairs that can be separated by comma, space, percent or just ran together.
Syntax:
"'^BMC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<source port>,<source
address>,<source state>,<codes>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
• source port = 1 - 100.
• source address = 1 - 4000.
• source state = 1 - 256.
codes:
BM - Picture/Bitmap
BR - Border
CB - Border Color
CF - Fill Color
CT - Text Color
EC - Text effect color
EF - Text effect
FT - Font
IC - Icon
JB - Bitmap alignment
JI - Icon alignment
JT - Text alignment
LN - Lines of video removed
OP - Opacity
SO - Button Sound
TX - Text
VI - Video slot ID
WW - Word wrap on/off
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-425,1,1,500,1,BR'"
or
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-425,1,1,500,1,%BR'"
Copies the OFF state border of button with a variable text address of 500 onto the OFF
state border of button with a variable text address of 425.
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-150,1,1,315,1,%BR%FT%TX%BM%IC%CF%CT'"
Copies the OFF state border, font, Text, bitmap, icon, fill color and text color of the button
with a variable text address of 315 onto the OFF state border, font, Text, bitmap, icon, fill
color and text color of the button with a variable text address of 150.
120
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BMF
Set any/all button
parameters by
sending
embedded codes
and data.
Syntax:
"'^BMF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<data>'"
Variables:
variable text address char array = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
level range = 1 - 600 (level value is 1 - 65535).
data:
’%R<left>, <top>, <right>, <bottom>’ = Set rectangle.
’%B<border style>’ = Set the border style name. See the Border Styles and
Programming Numbers table on page 114.
’%B’,<border 0-27,40,41> = Set the borer style number. See the Border Styles and
Programming Numbers table on page 114.
’%DO<1-5><1-5><1-5><1-5><1-5> = Set the draw order. Listed from bottom to top.
Refer to the ^BDO command on page 118 for more information.
’%F’,<font 1-8,10,11,20-29,32-xx> = Set the font. See the Default Font Styles and ID
Numbers table on page 114.
’%F<font 01-08,10,11,20-29,32-xx>’ = Set the font. See the Default Font Styles and ID
Numbers table on page 114.
’%MI<mask image>’ = Set the mask image. Refer to the ^BMI command on page 123 for
more information.
’%R = Sets button location and also resizes the button. Takes four parameters: left, top,
right, bottom.
’%T<text >’ = Set the text using ASCII characters (empty is clear).
’%P<bitmap>’ = Set the picture/bitmap filename (empty is clear).
’%I’,<icon 01-9900, 0-clear>’ = Set the icon using values of 01 - 9900 (icon numbers are
assigned in the TPDesign4 Resource Manager tab - Slots section).
’%I<icon 01-9900, 0-clear>’ = Set the icon using values of 01 - 9900 (icon numbers are
assigned in the TPDesign4 Resource Manager tab - Slots section).
’%J’,<alignment of text 1-9> = As shown the following telephone keypad alignment
chart:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Zero can be used for an absolute position
’%JT<alignment of text 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart,
BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’
’%JB<alignment of bitmap/picture 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad
alignment chart BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’
’%JI<alignment of icon 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart,
BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’
For some of these commands and values, refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic
Colors table on page 112.
’%CF<on fill color>’ = Set Fill Color.
’%CB<on border color>’ = Set Border Color.
’%CT<on text color>’ = Set Text Color.
’%SW<1 or 0>’ = Show/hide a button.
’%SO<sound>’ = Set the button sound.
’%EN<1 or 0>’ = Enable/disable a button.
’%WW<1 or 0>’ = Word wrap ON/OFF.
’%GH<bargraph hi>’ = Set the bargraph upper limit.
’%GL<bargraph low>’ = Set the bargraph lower limit.
’%GN<bargraph slider name>’ = Set the bargraph slider name/Joystick cursor name.
’%GC<bargraph slider color>’ = Set the bargraph slider color/Joystick cursor color.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
121
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BMF
(Cont.)
’%GI<bargraph invert>’ = Set the bargraph invert/noninvert or joystick coordinate
(0,1,2,3). ^GIV section on page 129 more information.
’%GU<bargraph ramp up>’ = Set the bargraph ramp up time in intervals of 1/10 second.
’%GD<bargraph ramp down>’ = Set the bargraph ramp down time in 1/10 second.
’%GG<bargraph drag increment> = Set the bargraph drag increment. Refer to the ^GDI
command on page 129 for more information.
’%VI<video ON/OFF>’ = Set the Video either ON (value=1) or OFF (value=0).
’%OT<feedback type>’ = Set the Feedback (Output) Type to one of the following:
None, Channel,Invert, ON (Always ON), Momentary, or Blink.
’%SM’ = Submit a text for text area button.
’%SF<1 or 0>’ = Set the focus for text area button.
’%OP<0-255>’ = Set the button opacity to either Invisible (value=0) or Opaque
(value=255).
’%OP#<00-FF>’ = Set the button opacity to either Invisible (value=00) or Opaque
(value=FF).
’%UN<Unicode text>’ = Set the Unicode text. See the ^UNI section on page 134 for the
text format.
’%LN<0-240>’ = Set the lines of video being removed. ^BLN section on page 119 for
more information.
’%EF<text effect name>’ = Set the text effect.
’%EC<text effect color>’ = Set the text effect color.
’%ML<max length>’ = Set the maximum length of a text area.
’%MK<input mask>’ = Set the input mask of a text area.
’%VL<0-1>’ = Log-On/Log-Off the computer control connection
’%VN<network name>’ = Set network connection name.
’%VP<password>’ = Set the network connection password.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMF-500,1,%B10%CFRed%CB Blue
%CTBlack%Ptest.png'"
Sets the button OFF state as well as the Border, Fill Color, Border Color, Text Color, and
Bitmap.
122
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BMI
Set the button
mask image.
Mask image is used to crop a borderless button to a non-square shape. This is typically
used with a bitmap.
Syntax:
"'^BMI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<mask image>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
mask image = Graphic file used.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMI-530,1&2,newMac.png'"
Sets the button with variable text 530 ON/OFF state mask image to 'newmac.png'.
"'^BMI-<variable text address range>,<button states range>,<mask image>'"
Set the Chameleon Image button property. See Working With Chameleon Images in
TPD4 Help.
Note: If the Border Style properties is set to something other than 'None', no visible
change will occur. Setting the Border Style to 'None' via ^BOR or ^BMF..%B will reveal the
Chameleon image.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^BMI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<mask
image>'"
Variables:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons
(0 = All states, for General buttons 1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
mask image = Chameleon used.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMI-530,1&2,newMac.png'"
Sets the button with variable text 530 ON/OFF state mask image to 'newmac.png'.
^BML
Set the maximum
length of the text
area button.
If this value is set to zero (0), the text area has no max length. The maximum length
available is 2000. This is only for a Text area input button and not for a Text area input
masking button.
Syntax:
"'^BML-<vt addr range>,<max length>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
max length = 2000 (0=no max length).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BML-500,20'"
Sets the maximum length of the text area input button to 20 characters.
^BMP
Syntax:
"'^BMP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<name of bitmap/
Assign a picture to
picture>'"
those buttons with
a defined address Variable:
range.
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
name of bitmap/picture = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMP-500.504&510.515,1,bitmap.png'"
Sets the OFF state picture for the buttons with variable text ranges of 500-504 & 510-515.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
123
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BNC
Syntax:
Clear current
TakeNote
annotations.
Variable:
"'^BNC-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
command value = (0= clear, 1= clear all).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNC-973,0'"
Clears the annotation of the TakeNote button with variable text 973.
^BNN
Set the TakeNote
network name for
the specified
Addresses.
Syntax:
"'^BNN-<vt addr range>,<network name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
network name = Use a valid IP Address.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNN-973,192.168.169.99'"
Sets the TakeNote button network name to 192.168.169.99.
^BNT
Set the TakeNote
network port for
the specified
Addresses.
Syntax:
"'^BNT-<vt addr range>,<network port>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
network port = 1 - 65535.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNT-973,5000'"
Sets the TakeNote button network port to 5000.
^BOP
Set the button
opacity.
The button opacity can be specified as a decimal between 0 - 255, where zero (0) is
invisible and 255 is opaque, or as a HEX code, as used in the color commands by
preceding the HEX code with the # sign. In this case, #00 becomes invisible and #FF
becomes opaque. If the opacity is set to zero (0), this does not make the button inactive,
only invisible.
Syntax:
"'^BOP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<button opacity>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
button opacity = 0 (invisible) - 255 (opaque).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOP-500.504&510.515,1,200'"
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOP-500.504&510.515,1,#C8'"
Both examples set the opacity of the buttons with the variable text range of 500-504 and
510-515 to 200.
124
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BOR
Set a border to a
specific border
style associated
with a border
value for those
buttons with a
defined address
range.
Refer to the Border Styles and Programming Numbers table on page 114 for more
information.
Syntax:
"'^BOR-<vt addr range>,<border style name or border value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
border style name = Refer to the Border Styles and Programming Numbers table on
page 114.
border value = 0 - 41.
Examples:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOR-500.504&510.515,10'"
Sets the border by number (#10) to those buttons with the variable text range of 500-504
& 510-515.
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOR-500.504&510,AMX Elite -M'"
Sets the border by name (AMX Elite) to those buttons with the variable text range of
500-504 & 510-515.
The border style is available through the TPDesign4 border-style drop-down list. Refer to
theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 114 for more information.
^BOS
Set the button to
display either a
Video or
Non-Video
window.
Syntax:
"'^BOS-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<video state>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
video state = Video Off = 0 and Video On = 1.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOS-500,1,1'"
Sets the button to display video.
^BPP
Zero clears the flag.
Syntax:
Set or clear the
protected page flip
"'^BPP-<vt addr range>,<protected page flip flag value>'"
flag of a
Variable:
button.
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
protected page flip flag value range = 0 - 4 (0 clears the flag).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BPP-500,1'"
Sets the button to protected page flip flag 1 (sets it to password 1).
^BRD
Set the border of
a button state/
states.
Only if the specified border is not the same as the current border. The border names are
available through the TPDesign4 border-name drop-down list.
Syntax:
"'^BRD-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<border name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
border name = Refer to the Border Styles and Programming Numbers table on
page 114.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BRD-500.504&510.515,1&2,Quad Line'"
Sets the border by name (Quad Line) to those buttons with the variable text range of
500-504 & 510-515.
Refer to theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 114.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
125
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BSF
Set the focus to
the text area.
Note: Select one button at a time (single variable text address). Do not assign a variable
text address range to set focus to multiple buttons. Only one variable text address can be
in focus at a time.
Syntax:
"'^BSF-<vt addr range>,<selection value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
selection value = Unselect = 0 and select = 1.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSF-500,1'"
Sets the focus to the text area of the button.
^BSM
This command causes the text areas to send their text as strings to the NetLinx Master.
Submit text for
text area buttons.
Syntax:
"'^BSM-<vt addr range>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSM-500'"
Submits the text of the text area button.
^BSO
Set the sound
played when a
button is pressed.
If the sound name is blank the sound is then cleared. If the sound name is not matched,
the button sound is not changed.
Syntax:
"'^BSO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<sound name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
sound name = (blank - sound cleared, not matched - button sound not changed).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSO-500,1&2,music.wav'"
Assigns the sound 'music.wav' to the button Off/On states.
^BSP
Set the button size and its position on the page.
Set the button
size and position.
Syntax:
"'^BSP-<vt addr range>,<left>,<top>,<right>,<bottom>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
left = left side of page.
top = top of page.
right = right side of page.
bottom = bottom of page.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSP-530,left,top'"
Sets the button with variable text 530 in the left side top of page.
^BVL
Log-On/Log-Off
the computer
control
connection.
Syntax:
"'^BVL-<vt addr range>,<connection>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
connection = 0 (Log-Off connection) and 1 (Log-On connection).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVL-500,0'"
Logs-off the computer control connection of the button.
126
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^BVN
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^BVN-<vt addr range>,<remote host>'"
Set the computer
control remote
Variables:
host for the
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
specified address.
remote host = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVN-500,191.191.191.191'"
Sets the remote host to '191.191.191.191' for the specific computer control button.
^BVP
Syntax:
"'^BVP-<vt addr range>,<network password>'"
Set the network
password for the
Variable:
specified address.
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
network password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVP-500,PCLOCK'"
Sets the password to PCLOCK for the specific PC control button.
Syntax:
"'^BVT-<vt addr range>,<network port>'"
Set the computer
control network
Variable:
port for the
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
specified address.
network port = 1 - 65535.
^BVT
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVT-500,5000'"
Sets the network port to 5000.
^BWW
By default, word-wrap is Off.
Set the button
word wrap
feature to those
buttons with a
defined address
range.
Syntax:
"'^BWW-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<word wrap>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
word wrap = (0=Off and 1=On). Default is Off.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BWW-500,1,1'"
Sets the word wrap on for the button’s Off state.
^CPF
Syntax:
"'^CPF-<vt addr range>'"
Clear all page flips
from a button.
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^CPF-500'"
Clears all page flips from the button.
^DLD
Syntax:
Set the disable
cradle LED flag.
Variable:
"'^DLD-<status>'"
status = (0= cradle operates normally, 1= forces the cradle LEDs to always be dim).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^DLD-1'"
Disables the cradle LEDs.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
127
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^DPF
Syntax:
Delete page flips
from button if it
already exists.
Variable:
"'^DFP-<vt addr range>,<actions>,<page name>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
actions =
Stan[dardPage] - Flip to standard page
Prev[iousPage] - Flip to previous page
Show[Popup] - Show Popup page
Hide[Popup] - Hide Popup page
Togg[lePopup] - Toggle popup state
ClearG[roup] - Clear popup page group from all pages
ClearP[age] - Clear all popup pages from a page with the specified page name
ClearA[ll] - Clear all popup pages from all pages
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^DPF-409,Prev'"
Deletes the assignment of a button from flipping to a previous page.
^ENA
Enable or disable
buttons with a set
variable text
range.
Syntax:
"'^ENA-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
command value = (0= disable, 1= enable)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ENA-500.504&510.515,0'"
Disables button pushes on buttons with variable text range 500-504 & 510-515.
^FON
Font ID numbers are generated by the TPDesign4 programmers report.
Set a font to a
specific Font ID
value for those
buttons with a
defined address
range.
Syntax:
"'^FON-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<font value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
font value = range = 1 - XXX. Refer to the Default Font Styles and ID Numbers section
on page 114.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^FON-500.504&510.515,1&2,4'"
Sets the font size to font ID #4 for the On and Off states of buttons with the variable text
range of 500-504 & 510-515.
The Font ID is generated by TPD4 and is located in TPD4 through the Main menu.
Panel > Generate Programmer's Report >Text Only Format >Readme.txt.
128
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^GDI
Syntax:
Change the
bargraph drag
increment.
Variable:
"'^GDI-<vt addr range>,<bargraph drag increment>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph drag increment = The default drag increment is 256.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GDI-7,128'"
Sets the bargraph with variable text 7 to a drag increment of 128.
^GIV
Invert the joystick
axis to move the
origin to another
corner.
Parameters 1,2, and 3 will cause a bargraph or slider to be inverted regardless of
orientation. Their effect will be as described for joysticks.
Syntax:
"'^GIV-<vt addr range>,<joystick axis to invert>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
joystick axis to invert = 0 - 3.
0
1
2
3
0 = Normal
1 = Invert horizontal axis
2 = Invert vertical axis
3 = Invert both axis locations
For a bargraph 1 = Invert, 0 = Non Invert
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GIV-500,3'"
Inverts the joystick axis origin to the bottom right corner.
^GLH
Syntax:
Change the
bargraph upper
limit.
Variable:
"'^GLH-<vt addr range>,<bargraph hi>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph limit range = 1 - 65535 (bargraph upper limit range).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GLH-500,1000'"
Changes the bargraph upper limit to 1000.
^GLL
Syntax:
Change the
bargraph lower
limit.
Variable:
"'^GLL-<vt addr range>,<bargraph low>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph limit range = 1 - 65535 (bargraph lower limit range).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GLL-500,150'"
Changes the bargraph lower limit to 150.
^GRD
Change the
bargraph
ramp-down time
in 1/10th of a
second.
Syntax:
"'^GRD-<vt addr range>,<bargraph ramp down time>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph ramp down time = In 1/10th of a second intervals.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GRD-500,200'"
Changes the bargraph ramp down time to 20 seconds.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
129
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^GRU
Change the
bargraph
ramp-up time in
1/10th of a
second.
Syntax:
"'^GRU-<vt addr range>,<bargraph ramp up time>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph ramp up time = In 1/10th of a second intervals.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GRU-500,100'"
Changes the bargraph ramp up time to 10 seconds.
^GSC
A user can also assign the color by Name and R,G,B value (RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).
Change the
bargraph slider
color or joystick
cursor color.
Syntax:
"'^GSC-<vt addr range>,<color value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
color value = Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 112.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GSC-500,12'"
Changes the bargraph or joystick slider color to Yellow.
^GSN
Change the
bargraph slider
name or joystick
cursor name.
Slider names and cursor names can be found in the TPDesign4 slider name and cursor
drop-down list.
Syntax:
"'^GSN-<vt addr range>,<bargraph slider name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
bargraph slider name = See table below.
Bargraph Slider Names:
None
Ball
Circle -L
Circle -M
Rectangle -L
Circle -S
Precision
Rectangle -M
Rectangle -S
Windows
Windows Active
Joystick Cursor Names:
None
Arrow
Ball
Circle
Crosshairs
Gunsight
Hand
Metal
Spiral
Target
View Finder
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GSN-500,Ball'"
Changes the bargraph slider name or the Joystick cursor name to ’Ball’.
^ICO
Syntax:
Set the icon to a
button.
Variable:
"'^ICO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<icon index>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
icon index range = 0 - 9900 (a value of 0 is clear).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ICO-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"
Sets the icon for On and Off states for buttons with variable text ranges of 500-504 &
510-515.
130
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^IRM
Set the IR
channel.
Pulse the given IR channel for onTime in tenths of seconds. Delay offTime in tenths of a
second before the next IR pulse is allowed. ^IRM allows the command itself to specify the
port number. ^IRM is needed because commands programmed on the panel itself can
only be sent to a single port number. (currently this is defined as 1 only).
Note: The port number of the IR will be the port number assigned in TPD4.
Syntax:
"'^IRM-<port>,<channel>,<onTime>,<offTime>'"
Variable:
port = User-defined port on the device (panel).
channel = 1 - 255 (channel to pulse).
onTime = 1/10th of a second.
offTime = 1/10th of a second.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^IRM-10,5, 20, 10'"
Sets the port 10 IR channel 5 on time to 1 second and off time to 2 seconds.
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative
to the upper left corner of the button.
Set bitmap/
picture alignment Syntax:
using a numeric
"'^JSB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text alignment>'"
keypad layout for Variable:
those buttons with
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
a defined address
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
range.
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
^JSB
new text alignment = Value of 1- 9 corresponds to the following locations:
0
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Zero can be used for an absolute position
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JSB-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"
Sets the off/on state picture alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable
text ranges of 500-504 & 510-515.
^JSI
Set icon
alignment using a
numeric keypad
layout for those
buttons with a
defined address
range.
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative
to the upper left corner of the button.
Syntax:
"'^JSI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new icon alignment>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
new icon alignment = Value of 1 - 9 corresponds to the following locations:
0
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Zero can be used for an absolute position
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JSI-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"
Sets the Off/On state icon alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable
text range of 500-504 & 510-515.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
131
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^JST
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative
to the upper left corner of the button.
Set text
alignment using a Syntax:
numeric keypad
"'^JST-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text alignment>'"
layout for those
Variable:
buttons with a
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
defined address
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
range.
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
new text alignment = Value of 1 - 9 corresponds to the following locations:
0
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Zero can be used for an absolute position
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JST-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"
Sets the text alignment to the upper left corner for those buttons with variable text ranges
of 500-504 & 510-515.
^MBT
Syntax:
Set the Mouse
Button mode On
for the virtual PC.
Variable:
"'^MBT-<pass data>'"
pass data:
0 = None
1 = Left
2 = Right
3 = Middle
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^MBT-1'"
Sets the mouse button mode to ’Left Mouse Click’.
^MDC
Turn On the
’Mouse
double-click’
feature for the
virtual PC.
Syntax:
"'^MDC'"
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^MDC'"
Sets the mouse double-click for use with the virtual PC.
^PIC
Syntax:
Start/stop Picture
View
Starts and stops Picture View.
^SHO
Syntax:
Show or hide a
button with a set
variable text
range.
^PIC-<0=stop,1=start>
"'^SHO-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
command value = (0= hide, 1= show).
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^SHO-500.504&510.515,0'"
Hides buttons with variable text address range 500-504 & 510-515.
132
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^TEC
Set the text effect
color for the
specified
addresses/states
to the specified
color.
The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4. You can also assign the
color by name or RGB value (RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).
Syntax:
"'^TEC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
color value = Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 112.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TEC-500.504&510.515,1&2,12'"
Sets the text effect color to Very Light Yellow on buttons with variable text 500-504
and 510-515.
^TEF
The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4.
Set the text effect. Syntax:
"'^TEF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<text effect name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
text effect name = Refer to the Text Effects table on page 136 for a listing of text effect
names.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TEF-500.504&510.515,1&2,Soft Drop Shadow 3'"
Sets the text effect to Soft Drop Shadow 3 for the button with variable text range 500-504
and 510-515.
^TOP
If enabled, Press/Move/Release events are sent to the Master as string events.
Enables/disables
touch output to
Master
Syntax:
"'^TOP-<state>'"
<state> is 0(disable) 1(presses/releases), 2(moves), 3(press/move/release).
Note: Move should be used with caution. This setting can generate a significant amount of
traffic to the master depending on user interaction.
Example command: "'^TOP-1'"
Example Response: "String Event: Text: Press,320,480"
Example Response: "String Event: Text: Release,320,480"
^TXT
Sets Non-Unicode text.
Assign a text
string to those
buttons with a
defined address
range.
Syntax:
"'^TXT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
new text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TXT-500.504&510.515,1&2,Test Only'"
Sets the On and Off state text for buttons with the variable text ranges of
500-504 & 510-515.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
133
Programming
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)
^UNI
Set Unicode text.
For the ^UNI command (%UN and ^BMF command), the Unicode text is sent as
ASCII-HEX nibbles.
Syntax:
"'^UNI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<unicode text>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
unicode text = Unicode HEX value.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^UNI-500,1,0041'"
Sets the button’s unicode character to ’A’.
Note: To send the variable text ’A’ in unicode to all states of the variable text
button 1, (for which the character code is 0041 Hex), send the following command:
SEND_COMMAND TP,"'^UNI-1,0,0041'"
Note: Unicode is always represented in a HEX value. TPD4 generates (through the Text
Enter Box dialog) unicode HEX values. Refer to the TPDesign4 Instruction Manual for
more information.
^WLD
Syntax:
Controls the
behavior of the
panel LED
Variables:
^WLD,<LED NUM>,<ACTION>,<VALUE>
<LED NUM> indicates the channel code or ID number.
0-RED
1-BLUE
2-GREEN
<ACTION> indicates the expected behavior of the LED.
0 - LED OFF
Turns LED Off
1 - LED ON
Turns LED On
2 - LED Resume
Restores operation of LED.
3 - LOW BRIGHTNESS Sets the low brightness value for LED when operating on
battery.
4 - HIGH BRIGHNESS Sets the high brightness value for LED when operating on
external power or docked.
5 - En/Disable Blink Enable LED blinking
6 - En/Disable Fade
Transitions from high/low are smooth
7 - Set Color
Set the tri-color (MVP9000i) LED to one of the supported NetLinx colors
(Yellow, Orange, VeryLightCyan, etc…)
134
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Miscellaneous MVP Strings
The following two strings are sent by the MVP panel back to the communicating Master:
MVP Strings to Master
undock-<user>
This is sent to the target Master when the MVP undock button (or the docking station
undock button) is pressed and a valid password is entered (if password is set up).
• If the panel has no information within the User Access Passwords list, ’none’ is sent as
a user.
• If the undock button in the System & Panel Options page (page 60) is used, ’setup’ is
sent.
UNDOCKED
This is sent when the panel is physically removed from the dock.
SWAP
This is sent after a panel swaps successfully from Wired to Wireless or from Wireless to
Wired. A successful swap occurs when there is not an offline and then online event from
the transition.
dock
• This is sent to the target Master when the MVP is docked.
MVP Panel Lock Passcode Commands
These commands are used to maintain a passcode list. With the MVP-9000i, a password must be entered to remove the
panel from the Wall Docking Station. Only the passcode is entered. The user entry is just for identifying the passcodes.
MVP Panel Lock Passcode Commands
^LPC
Clear all
users from the
User Access
Passwords list on
the Password
Setup page.
^LPR
Remove a given
user from the User
Access
Passwords list on
the Password
Setup page.
Syntax:
"'^LPC'"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^LPC'"
Clear all users from the User Access Password list on the Password Setup page.
Refer to the section on page 84 for more information.
Syntax:
"'^LPR-<user>'"
Variable:
user = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^LPR-Robert'"
Remove user named ’Robert’ from the User Access Password list on the Password
Setup page. Refer to the section on page 84 for more
information.
^LPS
Set the user name
and password.
This command allows you to:
1. Add a new user name and password OR
2. Set the password for a given user.
The user name and password combo is added to the User Access and/or Password list
in the Password Setup page. The user name must be alphanumeric.
Syntax:
"'^LPS-<user>,<passcode>'"
Variable:
user = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
passcode = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^LPS-Manager,undock'"
Sets a new user name as "Manager" and the password to "undock".
Example 2:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^LPS-Manager,test'"
Changes the given user name password to "test".
Refer to the section on page 84 for more information.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
135
Programming
Text Effects Names
The following is a listing of text effects names associated with the ^TEF command on page 133.
Text Effects
• Glow -S
• Medium Drop Shadow 1
• Hard Drop Shadow 1
• Glow -M
• Medium Drop Shadow 2
• Hard Drop Shadow 2
• Glow -L
• Medium Drop Shadow 3
• Hard Drop Shadow 3
• Glow -X
• Medium Drop Shadow 4
• Hard Drop Shadow 4
• Outline -S
• Medium Drop Shadow 5
• Hard Drop Shadow 5
• Outline -M
• Medium Drop Shadow 6
• Hard Drop Shadow 6
• Outline -L
• Medium Drop Shadow 7
• Hard Drop Shadow 7
• Outline -X
• Medium Drop Shadow 8
• Hard Drop Shadow 8
• Soft Drop Shadow 1
• Medium Drop Shadow 1 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 1 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 2
• Medium Drop Shadow 2 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 2 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 3
• Medium Drop Shadow 3 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 3 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 4
• Medium Drop Shadow 4 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 4 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 5
• Medium Drop Shadow 5 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 5 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 6
• Medium Drop Shadow 6 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 6 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 7
• Medium Drop Shadow 7 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 7 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 8
• Medium Drop Shadow 8 with
outline
• Hard Drop Shadow 8 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 1 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 2 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 3 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 4 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 5 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 6 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 7 with
outline
• Soft Drop Shadow 8 with
outline
136
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Button Query Commands
Button Query commands reply back with a custom event. There will be one custom event for each button/state
combination. Each query is assigned a unique custom event type. The following example is for debug purposes only:
NetLinx Example: CUSTOM_EVENT[device, Address, Custom event type]
DEFINE_EVENT
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1001]
// Text
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1002]
// Bitmap
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1003]
// Icon
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1004]
// Text Justification
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1005]
// Bitmap Justification
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1006]
// Icon Justification
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1007]
// Font
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1008]
// Text Effect Name
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1009]
// Text Effect Color
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1010]
// Word Wrap
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1011]
// ON state Border Color
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1012]
// ON state Fill Color
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1013]
// ON state Text Color
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1014]
// Border Name
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1015]
// Opacity
{
Send_String
Send_String
Send_String
Send_String
Send_String
Send_String
Send_String
0,"'ButtonGet Id=',ITOA(CUSTOM.ID),' Type=',ITOA(CUSTOM.TYPE)"
0,"'Flag
=',ITOA(CUSTOM.FLAG)"
0,"'VALUE1 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE1)"
0,"'VALUE2 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE2)"
0,"'VALUE3 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE3)"
0,"'TEXT
=',CUSTOM.TEXT"
0,"'TEXT LENGTH =',ITOA(LENGTH_STRING(CUSTOM.TEXT))"
}
All custom events have the following 7 fields:
Custom Event Fields
Field
Description
Uint Flag
0 means text is a standard string, 1 means Unicode encoded string
slong value1
button state number
slong value2
actual length of string (this is not encoded size)
slong value3
index of first character (usually 1 or same as optional index
string text
the text from the button
text length (string encode)
button text length
These fields are populated differently for each query command. The text length (String Encode) field is not used in any
command.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
137
Programming
Button Query Commands
?BCB
Syntax:
Get the current
border color.
Variable:
"'?BCB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1011:
Flag - zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)
Value3 - Zero
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCB-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' border color. information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1011
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 9
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
= #222222FF
TEXT LENGTH = 9
?BCF
Syntax:
Get the current fill
color.
Variable:
"'?BCF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1012:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)
Value3 - Zero
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCF-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' fill color information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1012
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 9
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
= #FF8000FF
TEXT LENGTH = 9
138
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?BCT
Syntax:
Get the current
text color.
Variable:
"'?BCT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1013:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)
Value3 - Zero
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCT-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' text color information.
The result sent to Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1013
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 9
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
= #FFFFFEFF
TEXT LENGTH = 9
?BMP
Syntax:
Get the current
bitmap name.
Variable:
"'?BMP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1002:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string
Value3 - Zero
Text - String that represents the bitmap name
Text length - Bitmap name text length (should be 9)
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BMP-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' bitmap information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1002
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 9
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
= Buggs.png
TEXT LENGTH = 9
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
139
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?BOP
Syntax:
Get the overall
button opacity.
Variable:
"'?BOP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1015:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Opacity
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BOP-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' opacity information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1015
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 200
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0
?BRD
Syntax:
Get the current
border name.
Variable:
"'?BRD-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1014:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string
Value3 - Zero
Text - String that represents border name
Text length - Border name length
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BRD-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' border information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1014
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 22
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
= Double Bevel Raised -L
TEXT LENGTH = 22
140
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?BWW
Syntax:
Get the current
word wrap flag
status.
Variable:
"'?BWW-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1010:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - 0 = no word wrap, 1 = word wrap
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BWW-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' word wrap flag status information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1010
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 1
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0
?FON
Syntax:
Get the current
font index.
Variable:
"'?FON-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1007:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Font index
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?FON-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' font type index information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1007
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 72
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
141
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?ICO
Syntax:
Get the current
icon index.
Variable:
"'?ICO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1003:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Icon Index
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?ICO-529,1&2'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' icon index information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1003
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 2
VALUE2 = 12
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0
?JSB
Syntax:
Get the current
bitmap
justification.
Variable:
"'?JSB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1005:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JSB-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' bitmap justification information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1005
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 5
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0
142
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?JSI
Syntax:
Get the current
icon
justification.
Variable:
"'?JSI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1006:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JSI-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' icon justification information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1006
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 6
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0
?JST
Syntax:
Get the current
text justification.
Variable:
"'?JST-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1004:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify
Value3 - Zero
Text - Blank
Text length - Zero
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JST-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' text justification information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1004
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 1
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
143
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?TEC
Syntax:
Get the current
text effect color.
Variable:
"'?TEC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1009:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)
Value3 - Zero
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TEC-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' text effect color information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1009
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 9
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
= #5088F2AE
TEXT LENGTH = 9
?TEF
Syntax:
Get the current
text effect name.
Variable:
"'?TEF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
custom event type 1008:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string
Value3 - Zero
Text - String that represents the text effect name
Text length - Text effect name length
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TEF-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' text effect name information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1008
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 18
VALUE3 = 0
TEXT
= Hard Drop Shadow 3
TEXT LENGTH = 18
144
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Button Query Commands (Cont.)
?TXT
Syntax:
Get the current
text information.
Variable:
"'?TXT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<optional index>'"
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
optional index = This is used if a string was too long to get back in one command.
The reply will start at this index.
custom event type 1001:
Flag - Zero
Value1 - Button state number
Value2 - Actual length of string
Value3 - Index
Text - Text from the button
Text length - Button text length
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TXT-529,1'"
Gets the button 'OFF state' text information.
The result sent to the Master would be:
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1001
Flag
= 0
VALUE1 = 1
VALUE2 = 14
VALUE3 = 1
TEXT
= This is a test
TEXT LENGTH = 14
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
145
Programming
Panel Runtime Operations
Serial Commands are used in Terminal Emulator mode. These commands are case insensitive.
Panel Runtime Operation Commands
ABEEP
Syntax:
Output a single
beep even if beep
is Off.
Example:
"'ABEEP'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'ABEEP'"
Outputs a beep of duration 1 beep even if beep is Off.
ADBEEP
Syntax:
Output a double
beep even if beep
is Off.
Example:
"'ADBEEP'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'ADBEEP'"
Outputs a double beep even if beep is Off.
@AKB
Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost. The Prompt
Text is optional.
Pop up the
keyboard icon and Syntax:
initialize the text
"'@AKB-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"
string to that
Variables:
specified.
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKB-Texas;Enter State'"
Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string 'Texas' with prompt text 'Enter State'.
AKEYB
Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost.
Syntax:
Pop up the
keyboard icon and
"'AKEYB-<initial text>'"
initialize the text
Variables:
string to that
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
specified.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEYB-This is a Test'"
Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string 'This is a Test'.
AKEYP
The keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost.
Pop up the
keypad icon and
initialize the text
string to that
specified.
Syntax:
"'AKEYP-<number string>'"
Variables:
number string = 0 - 9999.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEP-12345'"
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '12345'.
AKEYR
Remove the
Keyboard/
Keypad.
Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using 'AKEYB', 'AKEYP', 'PKEYP',
@AKB, @AKP, @PKP, @EKP, or @TKP commands.
Syntax:
"'AKEYR'"
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEYR'"
Removes the Keyboard/Keypad.
146
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)
@AKP
Pop up the
keypad icon and
initialize the text
string to that
specified.
Keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost. The Prompt Text
is optional.
Syntax:
"'@AKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"
Variables:
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKP-12345678;ENTER PASSWORD'"
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '12345678' with prompt text ’ENTER
PASSWORD’.
@AKR
Remove the
Keyboard/
Keypad.
Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using 'AKEYB', 'AKEYP', 'PKEYP',
@AKB, @AKP, @PKP, @EKP, or @TKP commands.
Syntax:
"'@AKR'"
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKR'"
Removes the Keyboard/Keypad.
BEEP
Output a beep.
Syntax:
"'BEEP'"
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'BEEP'"
Outputs a beep.
BRIT
Syntax:
Set the panel
brightness.
Variable:
"'BRIT-<brightness level>'"
brightness level = 0 - 100.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'BRIT-50'"
Sets the brightness level to 50.
@BRT
Syntax:
Set the panel
brightness.
Variable:
"'@BRT-<brightness level>'"
brightness level = 0 - 100.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@BRT-70'"
Sets the brightness level to 70.
DBEEP
Syntax:
Output a
double beep.
Example:
"'DBEEP'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'DBEEP'"
Outputs a double beep.
@EKP
Extend the
Keypad.
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. The Prompt Text is
optional.
Syntax:
"'@EKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"
Variables:
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@EKP-33333333;Enter Password'"
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '33333333' with prompt text 'Enter
Password'.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
147
Programming
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)
PKEYP
Present a private
keypad.
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. Keypad displays a
'*' instead of the numbers typed. The Prompt Text is optional.
Syntax:
"'PKEYP-<initial text>'"
Variables:
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'PKEYP-123456789'"
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '123456789' in '*'.
@PKP
Present a private
keypad.
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. Keypad displays a
'*' instead of the numbers typed. The Prompt Text is optional.
Syntax:
"'@PKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"
Variables:
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@PKP-1234567;ENTER PASSWORD'"
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 'ENTER PASSWORD' in '*'.
SETUP
Syntax:
Send panel to
SETUP page.
Example:
"'SETUP'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SETUP'"
Sends the panel to the Setup Page.
SHUTDOWN
Syntax:
"'SHUTDOWN'"
Shut down the
batteries providing Example:
power to the
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SHUTDOWN'"
panel.
Shuts-down the batteries feeding power to the panel. This function saves the battery from
discharging.
SLEEP
Syntax:
Force the panel
into screen saver
mode.
Example:
"'SLEEP'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SLEEP'"
Forces the panel into screen saver mode.
@SOU
Play a sound file.
Syntax:
"'@SOU-<sound name>'"
Variables:
sound name = Name of the sound file. Supported sound file formats are:
WAV & MP3.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@SOU-Music.wav'"
Plays the 'Music.wav' file.
148
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)
@TKP
Present a
telephone
keypad.
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. The Prompt Text is
optional.
Syntax:
"'@TKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"
Variables:
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@TKP-999.222.1211;Enter Phone Number'"
Pops-up the Keypad and initializes the text string '999.222.1211' with prompt text 'Enter
Phone Number'.
TPAGEON
Turn On page
tracking.
This command turns On page tracking, whereby when the page or popups change, a
string is sent to the Master. This string may be captured with a CREATE_BUFFER
command for one panel and sent directly to another panel.
Syntax:
"'TPAGEON'"
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'TPAGEON'"
Turns On page tracking.
TPAGEOFF
Syntax:
Turn Off page
tracking.
Example:
"'TPAGEOFF'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'TPAGEOFF'"
Turns Off page tracking.
@VKB
Syntax:
Popup the
virtual
keyboard.
Example:
"'@VKB'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@VKB'"
Pops-up the virtual keyboard.
WAKE
Syntax:
Force the panel
out of screen
saver mode.
Example:
"'WAKE'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'WAKE'"
Forces the panel out of the screen saver mode.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
149
Programming
Input Commands
These Send Commands are case insensitive.
Input Commands
^CAL
Syntax:
Put panel in
calibration mode.
Example:
"'^CAL'"
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^CAL'"
Puts the panel in calibration mode.
^KPS
Syntax:
Set the
keyboard
passthru.
Variable:
"'^KPS-<pass data>'"
pass data:
<blank/empty> = Disables the keyboard.
0 = Pass data to G4 application (default). This can be used with VPC or text areas.
1 - 4 = Not used.
5 = Sends out data to the Master.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^KPS-5'"
Sets the keyboard passthru to the Master. Option 5 sends keystrokes directly to the
Master via the Send Output String mechanism. This process sends a virtual keystroke
command (^VKS) to the Master.
Example 2:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^KPS-0'"
Disables the keyboard passthru to the Master.
The following point defines how the parameters within this command work:
• Accepts keystrokes from any of these sources: attached USB keyboard or Virtual
keyboard.
^VKS
Send one or more
virtual key strokes
to the G4
application.
Key presses and key releases are not distinguished except in the case of CTRL, ALT, and
SHIFT.
Refer to theEmbedded Codes table on page 151 that define special characters which
can be included with the string but may not be represented by the ASCII character set.
Syntax:
"'^VKS-<string>'"
Variable:
string = Only 1 string per command/only one stroke per command.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^VKS-'8"
Sends out the keystroke 'backspace' to the G4 application.
150
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Embedded codes
The following is a list of G4 compatible embedded codes:
Embedded Codes
Decimal numbers Hexidecimal values
Virtual keystroke
8
($08)
Backspace
13
($0D)
Enter
27
($1B)
ESC
128
($80)
CTRL key down
129
($81)
ALT key down
130
($82)
Shift key down
131
($83)
F1
132
($84)
F2
133
($85)
F3
134
($86)
F4
135
($87)
F5
136
($88)
F6
137
($89)
F7
138
($8A)
F8
139
($8B)
F9
140
($8C)
F10
141
($8D)
F11
142
($8E)
F12
143
($8F)
Num Lock
144
($90)
Caps Lock
145
($91)
Insert
146
($92)
Delete
147
($93)
Home
148
($94)
End
149
($95)
Page Up
150
($96)
Page Down
151
($97)
Scroll Lock
152
($98)
Pause
153
($99)
Break
154
($9A)
Print Screen
155
($9B)
SYSRQ
156
($9C)
Tab
157
($9D)
Windows
158
($9E)
Menu
159
($9F)
Up Arrow
160
($A0)
Down Arrow
161
($A1)
Left Arrow
162
($A2)
Right Arrow
192
($C0)
CTRL key up
193
($C1)
ALT key up
194
($C2)
Shift key up
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
151
Programming
Panel Setup Commands
These commands are case insensitive.
Panel Setup Commands
@PWD
@PWD sets the level 1 password only.
Set the page flip
password.
Syntax:
"'@PWD-<page flip password>'"
Variables:
page flip password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@PWD-Main'"
Sets the page flip password to 'Main'.
^PWD
Password level is required and must be 1 - 4.
Set the page flip
password.
Syntax:
"'^PWD-<password level>,<page flip password>'"
Variables:
password level = 1 - 4.
page flip password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^PWD-1,Main'"
Sets the page flip password on Password Level 1 to 'Main'.
152
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Dynamic Image Commands
The following table describes Dynamic Image Commands.
Dynamic Image Commands
^BBR
Set the bitmap of
a button to use a
particular
resource.
Syntax:
"'^BBR-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<resource name>'"
Variable:
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BBR-700,1,Sports_Image'"
Sets the resource name of the button to ’Sports_Image’.
^RAF
Adds any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data.
Add new
resources.
Since the embedded codes are preceded by a '%' character, any '%' character contained
in the URL must be escaped with a second '%' character (see example).
The file name field (indicated by a %F embedded code) may contain special escape
sequences as shown in the ^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes table below.
Syntax:
"'^RAF-<resource name>,<data>'"
Variables:
• resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
• data = Refers to the embedded codes, see the ^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes section
on page 154.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RAF-New Image,%P0%HAMX.COM%ALab/
Test%%5Ffile%Ftest.jpg'"
Adds a new resource.
• The resource name is ’New Image’
• %P (protocol) is an HTTP
• %H (host name) is AMX.COM
• %A (file path) is Lab/Test_file
• %F (file name) is test.jpg.
Note that the %%5F in the file path is actually encoded as %5F.
Syntax:
"'^RFR-<resource name>'"
Force a refresh for
a given resource. Variable:
^RFR
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RFR-Sports_Image'"
Forces a refresh on ’Sports_Image’.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
153
Programming
Dynamic Image Commands (Cont.)
^RMF
Modifies any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data.
Modify an
existing resource.
Since the embedded codes are preceded by a '%' character, any '%' character contained
in the URL must be escaped with a second '%' character (see example).
The file name field (indicated by a %F embedded code) may contain special escape
sequences as shown in the ^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes section on page 154.
Syntax:
"'^RMF-<resource name>,<data>'"
Variables:
• resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters
• data = Refers to the embedded codes, see the ^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes section
on page 154.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RMF-Sports_Image,%ALab%%5FTest/
Images%Ftest.jpg'"
Changes the resource ’Sports_Image’ file name to ’test.jpg’ and the path to ’Lab_Test/
Images’.
Note that the %%5F in the file path is actually encoded as %5F.
^RSR
Syntax:
Change the
refresh rate for a
given resource.
Variable:
"'^RSR-<resource name>,<refresh rate>'"
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.
refresh rate = Measured in seconds.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RSR-Sports_Image,5'"
Sets the refresh rate to 5 seconds for the given resource (’Sports_Image’).
^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes
The ^RAF and ^RMF commands add and modify any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data:
"'^RAF-<resource name>,<data>'"
"'^RMF-<resource name>,<data>'"
The <data> variable uses the embedded codes described in the following table:
^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes
Parameter Embedded Code
Description
protocol
’%P <0-1>’
Set protocol. HTTP (0) or FTP (1).
user
’%U <user>’
Set Username for authentication.
password
’%S <password>’
Set Password for authentication.
host
’%H <host>’
Set Host Name (fully qualified DNS or IP Address).
file
’%F <file>’
Full path to the location of the file or program that will return
the resource. The path must be a valid HTTP URL minus the
protocol and host.
The only exception to this is the inclusion of special escape
sequences and in the case of FTP protocol, regular
expressions.
path
’%A <path>’
Set Directory path. The path must be a valid HTTP URL minus
the protocol, host and filename.
The only exception to this is the inclusion of special escape
sequences and in the case of FTP protocol, regular
expressions.
refresh
’%R <refresh 1-65535>’
The number of seconds between refreshes in which the
resource is downloaded again. Refreshing a resource causes
the button displaying that resource to refresh also.
The default value is 0 (only download the resource once).
154
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
^RAF, ^RMF - Embedded Codes (Cont.)
Parameter Embedded Code
Description
newest
Set the newest file. A value of 1 means that only the most
recent file matching the pattern is downloaded.
’%N <0-1>’
Note: The 'newest file' option only applies to FTP Dynamic
Images, and only those that have pattern matching as part of
their filename. Neither 'newest file' nor pattern matching apply
to HTTP Dynamic Images.
When set, the panel will first pull a list of files matching the
given pattern from the specified FTP server and path. The
timestamps of the items in the list will be compared, with the
newest one being displayed on the panel. This is useful for
source devices that place a uniquely named still image in a
folder at constant intervals, allowing the panel always to
display the most recent one.
preserve
’%V <0-1>’
Set the value of the preserve flag.
Default is 0. Currently preserve has no function.
Escape Sequences
The ^RAF and ^RMF commands support the replacement of any special escape sequences in the filename (specified by
the %F embedded code) with the corresponding data obtained from the system as outlined in the table below:
Escape Sequences
Sequence Panel Information
$DV
Device Number
$SY
System Number
$IP
IP Address
$HN
Host Name
$MC
Mac Address
$ID
Neuron ID (Only supported on panels that use ICSNet; ignored on all other panels)
$PX
X resolution of current panel mode/file
$PY
Y resolution of current panel mode/file
$ST
Current state
$AC
Address code
$AP
Address port
$CC
Channel code
$CP
Channel port
$LC
Level code
$LP
Level port
$BX
X Resolution of Current button
$BY
Y Resolution of Current button
$BN
Name of Button
For instance, http://www.amx.com/img.asp?device=$DV
would become
http://www.amx.com/img.asp?device=10001.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
155
Programming
Intercom Commands
The following is a list of Intercom Commands:
Intercom Commands
Panel model name. If the panel supports intercom hardware it will respond with its model
Sets model name. name as shown in the response below. Older hardware or newer hardware that has
intercom support disabled with not respond to this command.
^MODEL?
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^MODEL?'"
Variables:
None.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND TP1,"'^MODEL?'"
Panel response string if intercom enabled:
^MODEL-MVP-8400i
^ICS-
^ICS-<IP>,<TX UDP port>,<RX UDP port>,<initial mode>'"
Intercom start.
Intercom start. Starts a call to the specified IP address and ports, where initial mode is
either 1 (talk) or 0 (listen) or 2 (both). If no mode is specified 0 (listen) is assumed. Please
note, however, that no data packets will actually flow until the intercom modify command is
sent to the panel.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^ICS-<IP>,<TX UDP port>,<RX UDP port>,<initial
mode>'"
Variables:
IP = IP Address of panel to connect with on an Intercom call.
TX UDP port = UDP port to transmit to.
RX UDP port = UDP port to receive from.
initial mode = 0 (listen) or 1 (talk) or 2 (handsfree). 0 is the default.
Examples:
Example of setting up a handsfree unicast call between two panels:
SEND_COMMAND TP1, "^ICS-192.168.0.3,9000,9002,2"
SEND_COMMAND TP2, "^ICS-192.168.0.4,9002,9000,2"
Example of setting up a multicast call where the first panel is paging two other panels:
SEND_COMMAND TP1, "^ICS-239.252.1.1,9002,9000,1"
SEND_COMMAND TP2, "^ICS-239.252.1.1,9002,9000,0"
SEND_COMMAND TP3, "^ICS-239.252.1.1,9002,9000,0"
Example of setting up a baby monitor call where the first panel is listening to the
microphone audio coming from the second panel:
SEND_COMMAND TP1, "^ICS-192.168.0.3,9000,9002,0"
SEND_COMMAND TP2, "^ICS-192.168.0.4,9002,9000,1"
^ICE'
Intercom end. This terminates an intercom call/connection.
Intercom end.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^ICE'"
Variables:
None.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND TP1,"'^ICE'"
SEND_COMMAND TP2,"'^ICE'"
Terminates an intercom call between two panels.
156
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
Intercom Commands (Cont.)
^ICM-TALK
Intercom modify command. For backwards compatibility both versions are supported.
^ICM-LISTEN
In this release, however, the TALK and LISTEN sub commands are ignored. The
microphone and/or speaker are activated based on the initial mode value of the intercom
start command and the audio data packet flow is started upon receipt of this command by
the panel.
Intercom modify
command.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^ICM-TALK'"
Variables:
None.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND TP1,"'^ICM-TALK'"
^ICM-MICLEVEL
Used to set the microphone level during an intercom call.
Intercom modify
command.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "^ICM-MICLEVEL"
Variables:
Valid levels are from 0 to 100.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND TP1, "^ICM-MICLEVEL,40"
^ICM-MUTEMIC
Intercom modify
command.
Set the state of the microphone on a panel to muted (1) or unmuted (0). At the start of
each call the microphone starts out unmuted.
Syntax:
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "^ICM-MUTEMIC"
Variables:
None.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND TP1, "^ICM-MUTEMIC,1"
Used to set the speaker level during an intercom call.
^ICMSPEAKERLEVEL Syntax:
Intercom modify
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>, "^ICM-SPEAKERLEVEL,55"
command.
Variables:
Valid levels are from 0 to 100.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND TP1, "^ICM-SPEAKERLEVEL,55"
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
157
Programming
SIP Commands
The following table lists and describes SIP commands that are generated from the touch panel.
SIP Commands
^PHNAUTOANSWER
Syntax:
"'^PHN-AUTOANSWER, <state>'"
Provides the state Variable:
of the
state = 0 or 1 (off or on)
auto-answer
Example:
feature.
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-AUTOANSWER, 1'"
^PHN-CALL
Provides call
progress
notification for a
call.
Syntax:
"'^PHN-CALL, <status>, <connection id>'"
Variable:
status = CONNECTED, DISCONNECTED, TRYING, RINGING, or HOLD.
connection id = The identifying number of the connection.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel"'^PHN-CALL, CONNECTED, 1'"
Notifies that the call is connected.
^PHN-DECLINE
Declines an
incoming call.
Decline (send to voice mail if configured) the incoming call on <CallID> as indicated from
the previous PHN-INCOMING message. CallID should be 0 or 1.
Syntax:
"'^PHN-DECLINE, <CallID>'"
Variable:
CallID = The identifying number of the connection.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-DECLINE,0""
^PHN-INCOMING Provides incoming call notification and the connection id used for all future commands
Provides incoming related to this call. The connection id will be 0 or 1.
Syntax:
call notification.
"'^PHN-INCOMING, <caller number>, <caller name>, <connection id>,
<timestamp>, '"
Variable:
caller number = The phone number of the incoming call.
caller name = The name associated with the caller number.
connection id = The identifying number of the connection.
timestamp = The current time in MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS format.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-INCOMING, 2125551000, AMX, 07/22/08
12:00:00, 1'"
^PHNLINESTATE
Indicates the
current state of
each of the
available
connections used
to manage calls.
Syntax:
"'^PHN-LINESTATE, <connection id>, <state>, <connection id>,
<state>,...'"
Variable:
connection id = The identifying number of the connection.
state = IDLE, HOLD, or CONNECTED
extn = The local extension of this panel (see Example)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-LINESTATE, 1, IDLE, 2, CONNECTED, SIP,
<extn>'"
158
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
SIP Commands (Cont.)
^PHNMSGWAITING
Indicates the
number of
messages waiting
the user’s voice
mail box.
Syntax:
"'^PHN-MSGWAITING, <messages>, <new message count>, <old message
count>, <new urgent message count>, <old urgent message count>'"
Variable:
messages = 0 or 1 (1 indicates new messages)
new message count = The number of new messages.
old message count = The number of old messages.
new urgent message count = The number of new messages marked urgent.
old urgent message count = The number of old messages marked urgent.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-MSGWAITING, 1, 1, 2, 1, 0’"
^PHN-PRIVACY
Syntax:
"'^PHN-PRIVACY, <state>'"
Indicates the state
of the privacy
Variable:
feature.
state = 0 (Disable) or 1 (Enable)
new message count = The number of new messages.
old message count = The number of old messages.
new urgent message count = The number of new messages marked urgent.
old urgent message count = The number of old messages marked urgent.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-PRIVACY, 0’"
^PHN-REDIAL
Syntax:
Indicates the
panel is redialing
the number.
Variable:
"'^PHN-REDIAL, <number>'"
number = The phone number to dial.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-REDIAL, 2125551000’"
^PHNTRANSFERRED
Syntax:
Indicates a call
has been
transferred.
Example:
"'^PHN-TRANSFERRED'"
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-TRANSFERRED’"
The following table lists and describes SIP commands that are sent to the touch panel to manage calls.
SIP Commands
^PHN-ANSWER
Answers the call.
Syntax:
"'^PHN-ANSWER, <connection id>'"
Variable:
connection id = The identifying number of the connection
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-ANSWER, 1'"
^PHNAUTOANSWER
Enables or
disables the
auto-answer
feature of the
phone.
Enables (1) or disables (0) the auto-answer feature on the phone.
Syntax:
"’^PHN-AUTOANSWER, <state>’"
Variable:
state = 0 (Disable) or 1 (Enable)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-AUTOANSWER, 1'"
Enables the auto-answer feature.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
159
Programming
SIP Commands (Cont.)
?PHNAUTOANSWER
The panel responds with the ^PHN-AUTOANSWER, <state> message.
Syntax:
Queries the state
of the autoanswer feature.
Example:
^PHN-CALL
Syntax:
Calls the
provided number.
Variable:
"’?PHN-AUTOANSWER’"
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'?PHN-AUTOANSWER'"
"’^PHN-CALL, <number>’"
number = The provided phone number
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-CALL,2125551000'"
^PHN-DTMF
Syntax:
Sends DTMF
codes.
Variable:
"’^PHN-DTMF, <DTMF code>’"
DTMF code = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, POUND, or ASTERISK.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-DTMF, 1234567879ASTERISK'"
^PHN-HANGUP
Hangs up the call.
Syntax:
"’^PHN-HANGUP, <connection id>’"
Variable:
connection id = The identifying number of the connection
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-HANGUP, 1'"
^PHN-HOLD
Syntax:
Places the call on
hold.
Variable:
"’^PHN-HOLD, <connection id>’"
connection id = The identifying number of the connection
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-HOLD, 1'"
?PHNLINESTATE
The panel responds with the ^PHN-LINESTATE message.
^PHN-PRIVACY
Enables or disables the privacy feature on the phone (do not disturb).
Enables or
disables the
privacy feature of
the phone.
Syntax:
Syntax:
Queries the state
"’?PHN-LINESTATE’"
of each of the
Example:
connections used
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'?PHN-LINESTATE'"
by the SIP device.
"’^PHN-PRIVACY, <state>’"
Variable:
state = 0 (Disable) or 1 (Enable)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-PRIVACY, 1'"
Enables the privacy feature.
?PHN-PRIVACY
The panel responds with the ^PHN-PRIVACY, <state> message.
Queries the state
of the privacy
feature.
Syntax:
"’?PHN-PRIVACY’"
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'?PHN-PRIVACY'"
^PHN-REDIAL
Syntax:
Redials the last
number.
Example:
"’^PHN-REDIAL’"
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-REDIAL'"
160
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Programming
SIP Commands (Cont.)
^PHNTRANSFER
Syntax:
Transfers the call
to the provided
number.
Variable:
"’^PHN-TRANSFER, <connection id>, <number>’"
connection id = The identifying number of the connection
number = The number to which you want to transfer the call.
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^PHN-TRANSFER, 1, 2125551000'"
The following table lists and describes SIP setup commands. Using any of these commands causes the current user to go
offline.
SIP Setup Commands
Syntax:
^PHN-SETUPDTMFDURATION
'^PHN-SETUP-DTMFDURATION, <duration in ms>'"
Changes the
Variable:
DTMF duration in
duration = range from 100ms to 3000ms
milliseconds
Example:
'^PHN-SETUP-DTMFDURATION, 250'"
^PHN-SETUPDOMAIN
Syntax:
Sets the realm for
authentication.
Variable:
"’^PHN-SETUP-DOMAIN,<domain>’"
domain = The realm used for authentication
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-DOMAIN,asterisk’"
^PHN-SETUPENABLE
Once the configuration has been updated, the ENABLE command should be run to reregister the new user.
Registers a new
user
Syntax:
^PHN-SETUPPASSWORD
Syntax:
Sets the user
password for the
proxy server.
Variable:
^PHN-SETUPPORT
Syntax:
Sets the port
number for the
proxy server.
Variable:
"’^PHN-SETUP-ENABLE’"
"’^PHN-SETUP-PASSWORD,<password>’"
password = The password for the user name
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-PASSWORD,6003’"
"’^PHN-SETUP-PORT,<port>’"
port = The port for the proxy server
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-PORT,5060’"
^PHN-SETUPPROXYADDR
Syntax:
Sets the IP
address for the
proxy server.
Variable:
"’^PHN-SETUP-PROXYADDR,<IP>’"
IP = The IP address for the proxy server
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-PROXYADDR,192.168.223.111’"
^PHN-SETUPSTUNADDR
Syntax:
Sets the IP
address for the
STUN server.
Variable:
"’^PHN-SETUP-STUNADDR,<IP>’"
IP = The IP address for the STUN server
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-STUNADDR,192.168.223.111’"
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
161
Programming
SIP Setup Commands (Cont.)
162
^PHN-SETUPUSERNAME
Syntax:
Sets the user
name for
authentication
with the proxy
server.
Variable:
"’^PHN-SETUP-USERNAME,<username>’"
username = The user name (usually the phone extension)
Example:
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"’^PHN-SETUP-USERNAME,6003’"
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Battery Life and Replacement
Battery Life and Replacement
Overview
The battery powering the MVP-9000i is designed for upwards of 300 deep discharge rechargings. Regular shallow
rechargings will extensively increase expected battery life, and the device should be stored in either the Table Docking
Station or the Wall Docking Station when not in use to keep it at an optimum charge. The battery has reached its effective
end of life after it can no longer hold more than a 70 percent charge.
Lithium-Polymer batteries are small, compact, and ideal for providing long lasting
power. However, they must be used and charged properly. Improper use can result in
serious injury, fire, or death.
Please read and understand the following warnings. If you have any questions or
concerns with this product, please contact your AMX sales representative.
This installation requires opening the case of the MVP-9000i and working within its
internal components. If you are unwilling or unable to replace the battery, please
return the device to AMX for battery replacement.
WARNING: Misuse of a Lithium-Polymer battery may result in overheating, fire, or
explosion!
Safety Information:
• Do not dismantle, open, or shred the battery.
• Do not short circuit the battery. Do not store batteries haphazardly in a box or
drawer where they may short circuit each other or be short circuited by conductive
materials.
• Do not remove a battery from its original packaging until required for use.
• Do not expose batteries to heat or fire. Avoid storage in direct sunlight.
• Do not subject the batteries to mechanical shock.
• In the event of a cell leaking, do not allow the liquid to come into contact with the
skin or eyes. If contact has been made, wash the affected area with copious
amounts of water and seek medical advice.
• Insure battery connector is aligned and installed correctly.
• Store the batteries in a dry place with temperature between 0° C (32° F) and 40° C
(104° F).
• Do not maintain the battery on charge when not in use.
• Note that batteries give their best performance when they are operated at normal
room temperature (20°C/68°F) ± 5°C/9°F).
• When disposing of batteries, keep cells or batteries of different electrochemical
systems separate from each other.
Charging
• Use only with approved AMX charger.
Care must be taken to install the battery without damaging the battery.
Risk of Explosion if Battery is replaced by an Incorrect Type. Dispose of Used
Batteries According to the Instructions.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
163
Battery Life and Replacement
IMPORTANT NOTES!
Lithium-Polymer battery technology degrades in capacity over time, unless the
battery is periodically charged and discharged. AMX recommends installing all
Lithium-Polymer batteries in functional AMX products within 6 months of receipt.
Charging Lithium Polymer batteries at high temperature will reduce the battery life.
Industry guidelines dictate that batteries should not be charged at temperatures
above 45° C (113° F). The temperature is determined by a combination of the
ambient temperature where the panel is located, plus temperature increases
normally occurring inside electronic devices containing batteries. AMX has
implemented battery temperature monitoring features to maximize the rate of battery
charging, while staying within industry temperature guidelines.
Battery charge times will increase in installations where the room temperature is
above 25° C (77° F), and may be temporarily suspended at room temperatures
above 30° C (86° F). Battery charging will automatically resume once the
temperature has fallen to appropriate levels. Minimizing the display backlight intensity
and turning off the backlight during periods of non-use will also yield faster charge
times.
Please dispose of all used batteries in a proper fashion as required by municipal or
federal regulations.
Prior to battery removal, run the device until the battery is completely discharged.
Power Management
Since the MVP-9000i is a battery-powered handheld device, power management is a necessary concern. Under active
use, the charge on the integral Lithium-Polymer battery can last for as long as five days. However, to maximize usability
and minimize the chances of the device becoming completely discharged at a critical moment, the MVP-9000i should be
kept in its charging cradle or wall station when not in use.
The MVP-9000i operates on four distinct power modes:
On - This is the normal power mode of the panel during operation. In this mode, all necessary modules are
powered up and their respective clocks are being driven appropriately. The device remains online with the
NetLinx Master and continues to appear in the online tree of NetLinx Studio.
Sleep - This mode of operation can be selected through the Setup Pages and only controls the backlight. In
this case, the unit remains on all the time, and only the backlight will be turned off after the user-selectable
time of inactivity has elapsed. The device remains online with the NetLinx Master and continues to be shown
in the online tree of NetLinx Studio. The unit shall transfer to the Awake mode after it detects a touch on the
touchscreen or capacitive touch buttons. This mode uses 50 percent of the power required for the Awake
mode.
Standby - In this mode, power to all components other than the touch screen is turned off after the user
selectable time of inactivity has elapsed. Device will turn back on by touching the screen. Re-acquiring an AP
connection may require up to 25 seconds.
Standby Mode cannot be entered if a USB device or microSD card is connected to
the MVP-9000i.
164
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Battery Life and Replacement
In Standby Mode, the panel will go offline.
Shutdown - The system enters this mode after a user selectable amount of inactivity time has elapsed or if the
battery level falls below 5 percent of its full charge. This is the absolute lowest mode of operation, during
which power to all peripherals and components is turned off. It is not online with the NetLinx Master and will
not appear in NetLinx Studio. The system remains in this mode until the screen is touched, or external power
is applied.
Power Modes for the MVP-9000i
Mode
Power Use
Time Available
(With Full Battery
Charge)
Current Draw on
Battery (A @ 8.4V)
Current Draw on
External Power
Supply (A @ 12V)
On
100%
5 hours
1.1
0.9
Sleep
50%
10 hours
0.38
0.3
Standby
15%
72 hours
0.07
N/A
Shutdown
Less than 1%
Up to one month
<0.01
N/A
Proper Battery Maintenance
To insure maximum performance and reliability of the MVP-9000i, please insure that a full charge is performed every 3
months if not used regularly. If a battery is left uncharged beyond this time frame, it may result in premature battery
lifespan degradation and will require replacement.
Battery Replacement
The touch panel's battery is intended to last the life of the device, but in cases where the battery has reached its effective
end of life, it may be replaced.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST!
To minimize the risk of damage to the battery during installation, all replacement batteries come in a protective metal
cover (FIG. 120). This cover cannot be removed from the battery.
FIG. 120 Lithium-Polymer battery for the MVP-9000i
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
165
Battery Life and Replacement
Replacing the Battery
Before replacing the battery, download and install the latest firmware for the MVP-9000i. This firmware is available at
www.amx.com.
IMPORTANT: Prior to battery removal, run the device until the battery is completely
discharged. Do NOT discharge the battery before installing the latest MVP-9000i
firmware, available at www.amx.com.
To remove an old battery and replace it:
1. Remove the battery from its packaging, remove the protective film from the battery, and inspect it for any damage
or distortion. If the battery shows evidence of damage, contact AMX for replacement and proper disposal
information.
2. Place the device face-down on a surface that will not scratch the unit and gently pry up the IR emitter cover. This
will usually be easier to do from the left side of the cover (FIG. 121).
Pry up on IR emitter cover
Screw slot
FIG. 121 IR emitter cover removal
Do NOT use tools of any sort in the screw slot, as this can damage the tab on the
back cover underneath the slot.
3. Once the IR emitter cover is free on one side, carefully lift up away from the device to loosen and remove the IR
emitter cover.
4. Remove the two screws underneath the IR emitter cover (FIG. 122).
Screws under IR emitter cover
FIG. 122 Placement of screws underneath IR emitter cover
166
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Battery Life and Replacement
5. Remove the five screws from the back of the device (FIG. 123).
Two screws under upper screw covers
3 screws under label
(beneath kickstand)
FIG. 123 Placement of screws on the back of the MVP-9000i
Two of the screws are at the upper corners of the device, underneath rubber feet that also act as screw covers.
Remove the rubber feet to access the screws.
Lift up the kickstand and remove the label to reach the remaining three screws.
6. Discharge all static electricity that may have built up on your body, either by using a static discharge strap or by
touching a nearby piece of metal.
7. Carefully remove the back of the device and detach the battery lead at the battery connector (FIG. 124). This will
allow the back cover to be detached from the device.
Battery (shown on
device for clarity)
Battery connector
Battery lead
FIG. 124 Interior of MVP-9000i, including female battery connector
Remove the old battery
1. Remove the two screws holding the battery case to the back cover. Carefully remove the battery from the back
cover. Please dispose of the battery in a proper fashion as required by municipal or federal regulations.
Installing the new battery
1. Open the plastic bag containing the MVP-BP-9 kit, taking care not to use sharp instruments near the battery itself.
2. Remove the protective film on the battery case. DO NOT install the battery without removing this film.
3. Attach the new battery to the back cover, either using the two screws used to hold the previous battery to the cover
or with the two replacement screws included with the MVP-BP-9 kit.
Reconnecting the battery to the device
1. On the back cover, make sure that the battery connector wiring runs to the left.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
167
Battery Life and Replacement
2. Make sure to seat fully the battery plug to the connector in the device (FIG. 124). If fingers cannot be used, use a
clean, nonconductive stick or probe to seat the connectors.
3. Reattach the back of the device, engaging the ledge at the bottom of the device and using it to swing the back down
into place.
When reassembling the device, take especial care not to pinch or squeeze the
connector wiring or the battery. Do not force the back cover onto the device, as this
can damage the device.
4. Insert the seven screws and replace the rubber feet atop the two upper screws, using the replacement rubber feet
included in the Battery Pack Kit. Replace the bottom label over the three bottom screws, using the replacement label
included in the Battery Pack Kit (FIG. 125).
Rubber feet
IR Emitter Cover
Position of replacement label
FIG. 125 Rear of the MVP-9000i-WH
5. Slide the IR emitter cover back into place over the emitter until it clicks.
6. Restart the device to confirm that the new battery is functioning correctly.
Please dispose of the old battery in a proper fashion as required by municipal or
federal regulations.
168
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Appendix A: Text Formatting
Appendix A: Text Formatting
Text Formatting Codes for Bargraphs/Joysticks
Text formatting codes for bargraphs provide a mechanism to allow a portion of a bargraphs text to be dynamically
provided information about the current status of the level (multistate and traditional). These codes are entered into the
text field along with any other text.
The following is a code list used for bargraphs:
Bargraph Text Code Inputs
Code
Bargraph
Multi-State Bargraph
$P
Display the current percentage of the
bargraph (derived from the Adjusted
Level Value as it falls between the
Range Values)
Display the current percentage of the
bargraph (derived from the Adjusted
Level Value as it falls between the
Range Values)
$V
Raw Level Value
Raw Level Value
$L
Range Low Value
Range Low Value
$H
Range High Value
Range High Value
$S
N/A
Current State
$A
Adjusted Level Value (Range Low Value Adjusted Level Value (Range Low Value
subtracted from the Raw Level Value)
subtracted from the Raw Level Value)
$R
Low Range subtracted from the High
Range
Low Range subtracted from the High
Range
$$
Dollar sign
Dollar sign
By changing the text on a button (via a VT command), you can modify the codes on a button. When one of the Text
Formatting Codes is encountered by the firmware, it is replaced with the correct value. These values are derived from the
following operations:
Formatting Code Operations
Code
Operation
$P
(Current Value - Range Low Value / Range High Value - Range Low Value) x 100
$V
Current Level Value
$L
Range Low Value
$H
Range High Value
$S
Current State (if regular bargraph then resolves to nothing)
$A
Current Value - Range Low Value
$R
Range High Value - Range Low Value
Given a current raw level value of 532, a range low value of 500, and a high range value of 600, the following text
formatting codes would yield the following strings as shown in the table below:
Example
Format
Display
$P%
32%
$A out of $R
32 out of 100
$A of 0 - $R
32 of 0 - 100
$V of $L - $H
532 of 500 - 600
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
169
Appendix A: Text Formatting
Text Area Input Masking
Text Area Input Masking may be used to limit the allowed/correct characters that are entered into a text area. For
example, in working with a zip code, a user could limit the entry to a max length of only 5 characters; with input
masking, this limit could be changed to 5 mandatory numerical digits and 4 optional numerical digits. A possible use for
this feature is to enter information into form fields. The purpose of this feature is to:
• Force the use of correct type of characters (i.e. numbers vs. characters)
• Limit the number of characters in a text area
• Suggest proper format with fixed characters
• Right to Left
• Required or Optional
• Change/Force a Case
• Create multiple logical fields
• Specify range of characters/number for each field
With this feature, it is not necessary to:
• Limit the user to a choice of selections
• Handle complex input tasks such as names, days of the week, or month by name
• Perform complex validation such as Subnet Mask validation
Input mask character types
These character types define what information is allowed to be entered in any specific instance. The following table lists
what characters in an input mask will define what characters are allowed in any given position.
Character Types
Character Masking Rule
0
Digit (0 to 9, entry required, plus [+] and minus [-] signs not allowed)
9
Digit or space (entry not required, plus and minus signs not allowed)
#
Digit or space (entry not required; plus and minus signs allowed)
L
Letter (A to Z, entry required)
?
Letter (A to Z, entry optional)
A
Letter or digit (entry required)
a
Letter or digit (entry optional)
&
Any character or a space (entry required)
C
Any character or a space (entry optional)
The number of the above characters used determines the length of the input masking
box. Example: 0000 requires an entry, requires digits to be used, and allows only 4
characters to be entered/used.
Refer to the following SEND_COMMANDs for more detailed information:
• ^BIM - Sets the input mask for the specified addresses. (see the ^BIM section on
page 119).
• ^BMF subcommand %MK - sets the input mask of a text area (see the
^BMF section on page 121).
170
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Appendix A: Text Formatting
Input Mask Ranges
These ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric value for a field. Only one range is allowed
per field. Using a range implies a numeric entry ONLY.
Input Mask Ranges
Character Meaning
[
Start range
]
End range
|
Range Separator
An example from the above table:
[0|255] This allows a user to enter a value from 0 to 255.
Input mask next field characters
These characters allow you to specify a list of characters that cause the keyboard to move the focus to the next field when
pressed, instead of inserting the text into the text area.
Input Mask Next Field Char
Character Meaning
{
Start Next Field List
}
End Next Field List
An example from the above table:
{.} or {:} or {.:} Proceed to the next text area input box after a user hits any of these keys.
Input mask operations
Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in the following way:
Input Mask Operators
Character Meaning
<
Forces all characters to be converted to lowercase
>
Forces all characters to be converted to uppercase
^
Sets the overflow flag for this field
Input mask literals
To define a literal character, enter any character, other than those shown in the above table (including spaces, and
symbols). A back-slash ('\') causes the character that follows it to be displayed as the literal character. For example, \A is
displayed just as the letter A. To define one of the following characters as a literal character, precede that character with
a back-slash. Text entry operation using Input Masks.
A keyboard entry using normal text entry is straightforward. However, once an input mask is applied, the behavior of the
keyboard needs to change to accommodate the input mask's requirement. When working with masks, any literal
characters in the mask will be "skipped" by any cursor movement, including cursor, backspace, and delete keys.
When operating with a mask, the mask should be displayed with placeholders. The "-" character should display where
you should enter a character. The arrow keys will move between the "-" characters and allow you to replace them. The
text entry code operates as if it is in the overwrite mode. If the cursor is positioned on a character already entered and you
type in a new (and valid) character, the new character replaces the old character. There is no shifting of characters.
When working with ranges specified by the [] mask, the keyboard allows you to enter a number between the values listed
in the ranges. If a user enters a value that is larger than the maximum, the maximum number of right-most characters is
used to create a new, acceptable value.
Example 1: If you type "125" into a field accepting 0-100, then the values displayed will be "1", "12", "25".
Example 2: If the max for the field was 20, then the values displayed will
be "1", "12", "5".
When data overflows from a numerical field, the overflow value is added to the previous field on the chain if the
overflow character was specified. In the above example, if the overflow flag was set, the first example will place the "1"
into the previous logical field and the second example will place "12" in the previous logical field. If the overflow field
already contains a value, the new value will be inserted to the right of the current characters and the overflow field will be
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
171
Appendix A: Text Formatting
evaluated. Overflow continues to work until a field with no overflow value is set or no more fields remain (i.e. reached
first field).
If a character is typed and that character appears in the Next Field list, the keyboard should move the focus to the next
field. For example, when entering time, a ":" is used as a next field character. If you enter "1:2", the 1 is entered in the
current field (hours) and then the focus is moved to the next field and 2 is entered in that field.
When entering time in a 12-hour format, entry of AM and PM is required. Instead of adding AM/PM to the input mask
specification, the AM/PM should be handled within the NetLinx code. This allows a programmer to show/hide and
provide discrete feedback for AM and PM.
Input mask output examples
The following are some common input masking examples:
Output Examples
Common Name
Input Mask
Input
IP Address Quad
[0|255]{.}
Any value from 0 to 255
Hour
[1|12]{:}
Any value from 1 to 12
Minute/Second
[0|59]{:}
Any value from 0 to 59
Frames
[0|29]{:}
Any value from 0 to 29
Phone Numbers
(999) 000-0000
(555) 555-5555
Zip Code
00000-9999
75082-4567
URL Resources
A URL can be broken into several parts. For example, with the URL http://www.amx.com/company-info-home.asp, this
URL indicates that the protocol in use is http (HyperText Transport Protocol) and that the information resides on a host
machine named www.amx.com. The image on that host machine is given an assignment (by the program) name of
company-info-home.asp (Active Server Page).
The exact meaning of this name on the host machine is both protocol dependent and host dependent. The information
normally resides in a file, but it could be generated dynamically. This component of the URL is called the file
component, even though the information is not necessarily in a file.
A URL can optionally specify a port, which is the port number to which the TCP/IP connection is made on the remote
host machine. If the port is not specified, the default port for the protocol is used instead. For example, the default port
for http is 80. An alternative port could be specified as: http://www.amx.com:8080/company-info-home.asp.
Any legal HTTP syntax can be used.
172
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Appendix A: Text Formatting
Special Escape Sequences
The system has only a limited knowledge of URL formats, as it transparently passes the URL information onto the server
for translation. A user can then pass any parameters to the server side programs such as CGI scripts or active server
pages.
However; the system will parse the URL looking for special escape codes. When it finds an escape code, it replaces that
code with a particular piece of panel, button, or state information.
For example, "http://www.amx.com/img.asp?device=$DV" would become http://www.amx.com/img.asp?device=10001.
Other used escape sequences include:
Escape Sequences
Sequence
Panel Information
$DV
Device Number
$SY
System Number
$IP
IP Address
$HN
Host Name
$MC
Mac Address
$ID
Neuron ID
$PX
X Resolution of current panel mode/file
$PY
Y Resolution of current panel mode/file
$BX
X Resolution of current button
$BY
Y Resolution of current button
$BN
Name of button
$ST
Current state
$AC
Address Code
$AP
Address Port
$CC
Channel Code
$CP
Channel Port
$LC
Level Code
$LP
Level Port
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
173
Appendix A: Text Formatting
Complex Script Support
In many cases, a user needs a touch panel user interface that utilizes a font applicable to the area for which its use is
intended, and to accomplish this without needing to resort to images of properly formed text. This includes proper
rendering of right-to-left languages such as, but not limited to, Arabic, Hebrew, Thai and Devangari (FIG. 126). Both the
MVP-9000i and TPDesign4 (v3.1 or higher) support complex script languages, to the extent that the True Type font
currently selected for that state supports the language in question. TPDesign4 allows the user to type the desired text into
a project, view it in G4Panel Preview, and download it to the panel.
FIG. 126 Warning page in Arabic
Most languages can be entered into the state property field in TPDesign4 via the
Windows language bar.
In some cases, the user may need correct rendering of mixed left-to-right and right-to-left text, and may display both of
these together in the same page (FIG. 127). Text edit boxes only operate left-to-right.
FIG. 127 Mixed left-to-right and right-to-left text
Some languages, notably Hindi and Tamil, are not supported by coded pages. These languages will display “???” for
characters entered via the language bar, even if the selected font supports the language. Text in these languages can still
be pasted via the clipboard or via the Alt-<Scan Code> method.
For more information on TPDesign4 and its complex script support, please refer to
the TPDesign4 (v3.0 or higher) Operation Reference Guide, available at
www.amx.com.
174
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Appendix B: Wireless Technology
Appendix B: Wireless Technology
Overview of Wireless Technology
802.11b/2.4 GHz and 802.11a/5 GHz are the two major WLAN standards and both operate using radio
frequency (RF) technology. Together the two standards are together called WiFi and operate in frequency
bands of 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz respectively.
The 802.11b specification was the first to be finalized and reach the marketplace. The actual throughput
obtained from an 802.11b network will typically be between 4 and 5 Mbps.
Because of the higher frequency (and thus shorter wavelength) that they use, 802.11a signals have a much
tougher time penetrating solid objects like walls, floors, and ceilings. As a result, the price for 802.11a's
higher speed is not only a shorter range but also a weaker and less consistent signal.
802.11a/b/g provides increased bandwidth at 54 Mbps. As part of the IEEE 802.11a/b/g specification, when
throughput cannot be maintained, this card will automatically switch algorithms in order to maintain the
highest spread possible at a given distance. In addition, 802.11a/b/g can also step down to utilize 802.11b
algorithms and also maintain a connection at longer distances.
IP Routing is a wireless routing behavior that is largely dependent on the wired network interface. Although
the panel can be connected to two networks simultaneously, it may only have one gateway. If the wired
network was successfully set up and a gateway was obtained; then the default route for all network traffic will
be via the wired network. In the event that the wired network was not configured, then the default route for all
network traffic will be via the wireless network. The wired network connection always takes priority.
Example: Imagine a panel connected to the two networks A & B. A is the wired network and B is the wireless
network. If the Master controller is on either of these networks, then it will be reached. However if the Master
controller is on a different network, C, then the gateway determines which network interface (wired or
wireless) will be used. If the Master controller is on network B and the panel is docked, the Master would still
be reached through network A, even if the interface is on B.
Access Points (APs) are the cornerstone of any wireless network. An AP acts as a bridge between a wired and
wireless network. It aggregates the traffic from all wireless clients and forwards it down the network to the
switch or router. One AP may be all that is necessary for a standard installation. However, more APs may be
needed, depending on the size of the installation, its layout, and its construction.
Wireless Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Security is a method by which WLANs protect wireless data streams.
A data stream encrypted with WEP can still be intercepted or eavesdropped upon, but the encryption makes
the data unintelligible to the interloper. The strength of WEP is measured by the length of the key used to
encrypt the data. The longer the key, the harder it is to crack.
802.11b implementations provided 64-bit and 128-bit WEP keys. This is known respectively as 64-bit and
128-bit WEP encryption. 64-bit is generally not regarded as adequate security protection. Both key lengths
are supported by the Modero product line.
Whichever level of WEP used, using identical settings is crucial (CASE SENSITIVE)--the key length, and
the key itself-- on all devices. Only devices with common WEP settings will be able to communicate.
Similarly,
If one device has WEP enabled and another does not, they will not be able to talk to each other.
Although the calculations required to encrypt data with WEP can impact the performance of your wireless
network, this impact is generally only seen when running benchmarks, and is not large enough to be
noticeable in the course of normal network usage.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
175
Appendix B: Wireless Technology
Terminology
802.1x
IEEE 802.1x is an IEEE standard that is built on the Internet standard EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol). 802.1x
is a standard for passing EAP messages over either a wired or wireless LAN. Additionally, 802.1x is also responsible for
communicating the method with which APs and wireless users can share and change encryption keys. This continuous
key change helps resolve any major security vulnerabilities native to WEP.
AES
Short for Advanced Encryption Standard, is a cipher currently approved by the NSA to protect US Government
documents classified as Top Secret. The AES cipher is the first cipher protecting Top Secret information available to the
general public.
CERTIFICATES (CA)
A certificate can have many forms, but at the most basic level, a certificate is an identity combined with a public key, and
then signed by a certification authority. The certificate authority (CA) is a trusted external third party which "signs" or
validates the certificate. When a certificate has been signed, it gains some cryptographic properties. AMX supports the
following security certificates within three different formats:
PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail)
DER (Distinguished Encoding Rules)
PKCS12 (Public Key Cryptography Standard #12)
Typical certificate information can include the following items:
Certificate Issue Date
Extensions
Issuer
Public Key
Serial Number
Signature Algorithm
User
Version
MIC
Short for Message Integrity Check, this prevents forged packets from being sent. Through WEP, it was possible to alter a
packet whose content was known even if it had not been decrypted.
TKIP
Short for Temporal Key Integration, this is part of the IEEE 802.11i encryption standard for wireless LANs. TKIP
provides a per-packet key mixing, message integrity check and re-keying mechanism, thus ensuring that every data
packet is sent with its own unique encryption key. Key mixing increases the complexity of decoding the keys by giving
the hacker much less data that has been encrypted using any one key.
WEP
Short for Wired Equivalent Privacy, WEP is a scheme used to secure wireless networks (WiFi). A wireless network
broadcasts messages using radio which are particularly susceptible to hacker attacks. WEP was intended to provide the
confidentiality and security comparable to that of a traditional wired network. As a result of identified weaknesses in this
scheme, WEP was superseded by WiFi Protected Access (WPA), and then by the full IEEE 802.11i standard (also known
as WPA2).
WPA
WiFi Protected Access (WPA and WPA2) is a class of system used to secure wireless (WiFi) computer networks. It was
created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous WEP system. WPA implements
the majority of the IEEE 802.11i standard, and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while
802.11i was prepared (WPA2).
WPA is designed to work with all wireless network interface cards, but not necessarily with first generation wireless
access points.
To resolve problems with WEP, the WiFi Alliance released WPA (FIG. 128), which integrated 802.1x, TKIP and MIC.
Within the WPA specifications, the RC4 cipher engine was maintained from WEP. RC4 is widely used in SSL (Secure
Socket Layer) to protect internet traffic.
176
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Appendix B: Wireless Technology
FIG. 128 WPA Overview
WPA2
Also know as IEEE 802.11i, this is an amendment to the 802.11 standard specifying security mechanisms for wireless
networks. The 802.11i scheme makes use of the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) block cipher; WEP and WPA use
the RC4 stream cipher.
The 802.11i architecture contains the following components: 802.1X for authentication (entailing the use of EAP and an
authentication server), RSN for keeping track of associations, and AES-based CCMP to provide confidentiality, integrity
and origin authentication.
WPA2 implements the full standard, but will not work with some older network cards. Both provide good security, with
two significant issues:
either WPA or WPA2 must be enabled and chosen in preference to WEP.
WEP is usually presented as the first security choice in most installation instructions.
in the "Personal" mode, the most likely choice for homes and small offices, a passphrase is required that, for
full security, must be longer than the typical 6 to 8 character passwords users are taught to employ.
With the RC4 released to the general public, the IEEE implemented the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) as the
cipher engine for 802.11i, which the WiFi Alliance has branded as WPA2 (FIG. 129).
FIG. 129 WPA2 Overview
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
177
Appendix B: Wireless Technology
EAP Authentication
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an Enterprise authentication protocol that can be used in both a wired and
wireless network environment. EAP requires the use of an 802.1x Authentication Server, also known as a RADIUS
server. Although over 40 different EAP methods are currently defined, the current internal Modero 802.11a/b/g wireless
card and accompanying firmware only support the following EAP methods (listed from simplest to most complex):
EAP-LEAP (Cisco Light EAP)
EAP-FAST (Cisco Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling, a.k.a. LEAPv2)
The following use certificates:
EAP-PEAP (Protected EAP)
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security)
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
EAP requires the use of an 802.1x authentication server (also known as a RADIUS server). The most common RADIUS
servers used in wireless networks today are:
Microsoft Sever 2003
Juniper Odyssey (once called Funk Odyssey)
Meetinghouse AEGIS Server
Devicescape RADIUS Server
Cisco Secure ACS
EAP Characteristics
The following table outlines the differences among the various EAP Methods from most secure (at the top of the list) to
the least secure (at the bottom of the list):
EAP Method Characteristics
Method:
Credential Type:
Authentication:
Pros:
Cons:
EAP-TLS
• Certificates
• Certificate is based on a
two-way authentication
• Highest
Security
• Difficult to
deploy
EAP-TTLS
• Certificates
• Client authentication is
done via password and
certificates
• High Security
• Moderately
difficult to
deploy
• High Security
• Moderately
difficult to
deploy
• Easy
deployment
• Susceptible
to dictionary
attacks
• N/A
• N/A
• Fixed Passwords
• One-time passwords (tokens)
• Server authentication is
done via certificates
EAP-PEAP
• Certificates
• Fixed Passwords
• One-time passwords (tokens)
• Client authentication is
done via password and
certificates
• Server authentication is
done via certificates
EAP-LEAP
• Authentication is based
on MS-CHAP and
MS-CHAPv2
• One-time passwords (tokens)
authentication protocols
• Certificates
• Fixed Passwords
EAP-FAST
• Certificates
• N/A
• Fixed Passwords
• One-time passwords (tokens)
178
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Appendix B: Wireless Technology
EAP Communication Overview
EAP Authentication goes a step beyond just encrypting data transfers, but also requires that a set of credentials be
validated before the client (panel) is allowed to connect to the rest of the network (FIG. 130). Below is a description of
this process. It is important to note that no user intervention is necessary during this process. It proceeds automatically
based on the configuration parameters entered into the panel.
LAN
802.1x
(EAP Over Wireless)
Client - Panel
(Supplicant)
Authenticator
(Wireless Access Point)
Authentication Server
(RADIUS Server)
FIG. 130 EAP security method in process
1. The client (panel) establishes a wireless connection with the AP specified by the SSID.
2. The AP opens up a tunnel between itself and the RADIUS server configured via the access point. This tunnel means
that packets can flow between the panel and the RADIUS server but nowhere else. The network is protected until
authentication of the client (panel) is complete and the ID of the client is verified.
3. The AP (Authenticator) sends an "EAP-Request/Identity" message to the panel as soon as the wireless connection
becomes active.
4. The panel then sends a "EAP-Response/Identity" message through the AP to the RADIUS server providing its
identity and specifying which EAP type it wants to use. If the server does not support the EAP type, then it sends a
failure message back to the AP which will then disconnect the panel. As an example, EAP-FAST is only supported
by the Cisco server.
5. If the EAP type is supported, the server then sends a message back to the client (panel) indicating what information
it needs. This can be as simple as a username (Identity) and password or as complex as multiple CA certificates.
6. The panel then responds with the requested information. If everything matches, and the panel provides the proper
credentials, the RADIUS server then sends a success message to the access point instructing it to allow the panel to
communicate with other devices on the network. At this point, the AP completes the process for allowing LAN
Access to the panel (possibly a restricted access based on attributes that came back from the RADIUS server).
As an example, the AP might switch the panel to a particular VLAN or install a set of farewell rules.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
179
Appendix B: Wireless Technology
Configuring Modero Firmware via the USB Port
The MVP-9000i needs to be configured to connect with a PC to transfer firmware via the mini-USB port. To configure
the touch panel:
Step 1: Configure The Panel For a USB Connection Type
1. After the panel powers up, hold the Reset button to display the Setup page (for more information, refer to the
Accessing the Setup pages section on page 43) and open the Protected Setup page.
2. Press System Settings to open the System Settings page.
3. Toggle the blue Type field in the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to USB.
ALL fields are then greyed out and read-only. However, they still display any previous
network information.
4. Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page.
5. Press the Reboot button both to save any changes and to restart the panel. Remember that the panel’s connection
type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to inserting the USB connector.
6. ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page should you THEN insert the mini-USB connector into the
Mini-USB Port on the panel. It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new connection and send a signal to the
PC, indicated by a green System Connection icon.
If a few minutes have gone by and the System Connection icon still does not turn green, complete the
procedures in the following section to set up the Virtual Master and refresh the System from the Online Tree.
This action sends out a request to the panel to respond and completes the communication, turning the System
Connection icon green.
7. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to return to the System Settings page
Step 2: Prepare NetLinx Studio For Communication Via the USB Port
1. From the Start menu in Windows XP, open the Network Connections dialog (Start > Settings > Network
Connections > Local Area Connection).
2. Look for the Local Area Connection reading Local Area Connection, AMX USB Device Link and double-click on it
to open the Local Status.
3. Press the Properties tab to open the Local Area Connection Properties section.
4. Press the Properties button to open the TCP/IP Properties dialog box.
5. Set the IP address to an address within the same subnet as the panel IP address specified within the USB IP settings
of the panel. For instance, if the default IP address on the device is 172.16.0.2, set the IP address to 172.16.0.1. Use
any class and number currently not being used by your network.
6. Set the Subnet Mask to 255.255.0.0.
7. In the TCP/IP Properties dialog box, click OK.
8. In the Local Area Connection Properties, section, click Close.
180
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Appendix B: Wireless Technology
AMX Certificate Upload Utility
The Certificate Upload utility gives you the ability to compile a list of target touch panels, select a pre-obtained
certificate (uniquely identifying the panel), and then upload that file to the selected panel.
This application must be run from a local machine and should not be used from a
remote network location.
This application ensures that a unique certificate is securely uploaded to a specific touch panel. Currently, the target
panels must be capable of supporting the WPA-PSK and EAP-XXX wireless security formats.
The Certificate Upload utility supports the following capabilities:
Ability to browse both a local and network drive to find a desired certificate file.
Ability to create a list of target AMX G4 touch panels based on IP Addresses.
Ability to display the IP Address of the local computer hosting the application.
Ability to load a previously created list of target touch panels.
Ability to save the current list of target Modero panel as a file.
Ability to track the progress of the certificate upload by noting the current data size being transmitted and any
associated error messages (if any).
The Certificate Upload Utility recognizes the following certificate file types:
CER (Certificate File)
DER (Distinguished Encoding Rules)
PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail)
PFX (Normal Windows generated certificate)
PVK (Private Key file)
Uploading a Certificate File
1. Install the latest AMX USB LAN LINK driver onto your computer by installing the latest versions of either
TPDesign4 or NetLinx Studio. This USB driver prepares your computer for proper communication with the MVP9000i.
2.
Access the target panel's Protected Setup page and establish a connection.
3. With the panel successfully communicating with the target computer, launch the Certificate Upload Utility.
Familiarize yourself with the Certificate Utility User Interface options.
4. Locate your certificate file by using the Browse button and navigating to the desired file type.
5. Use the drop-down arrow in the Local Address field to select direct communication through the USB port.
6. Select the 172.XX.0.1 IP Address that corresponds to the virtual IP Address assigned to the USB connection port on
the computer.
7. Navigate to the Add IP Address field at the bottom-right of the interface and enter a value of 1 greater than the
virtual USB IP Address.
For example: If the virtual USB IP Address is 176.16.0.1, then add an address for the directly connected panel of
176.16.0.2. This is one greater than the USB address value detected by the utility.
A certificate may be sent to ONLY ONE directly connected panel via USB.
Use the Ethernet port’s IP Address to send a server certificate to multiple panel targets.
8. Select the IP Address which corresponds to the local computer's Ethernet address.
9. Navigate to the Add IP Address field (bottom-right of the interface) and enter the IP Addresses of the various target
touch panels.
10. Click the Add button to complete the entry and add the new IP Address to the listing of available device IP
Addresses. Repeat this process for all subsequent device IP Addresses.
11. Once the list is complete, click on the File drop-down menu and select the Save option. This launches a Save dialog
to assign a name to the current list of addresses and then save the information as a TXT (text) file to a known
location.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
181
Appendix B: Wireless Technology
This application must be run from a local machine and should not be used from a
remote network location.
12. Select the target devices to be uploaded with the selected certificate. These may be:
individually selected by toggling the box next to the Send entry (with the Type column).
selected as a group by clicking on the Check All radio box located at the top of the device IP Address listing.
13. When ready to send the certificate file to the selected panels, click the Send button to initiate the upload.
Once the Status field for each entry reads Done, the upload was successfully completed.
The AMX Certificate Upload Utility is intended to be used for only one certificate at a time on the touch panel, and has
no indicator that a certification has been loaded onto a touch panel. After a certification has been loaded onto a panel
using the Certificate Upload Utility, you should immediately enter the certificate name (including file extension) into the
Client Certificate field for the specified SSID. (For more information on the Client Certificate field in the Enterprise
Mode popup window, please refer to the Security Modes section on page 68.) Make sure to double-check that the
Security Type is correct.
Erasing All Certificates From the Touch Panel
Individual certificates may not be removed from the touch panel. However, all certificates may be removed from the
device by using the erase cert telnet command, Certificates may then be re-uploaded, using the AMX Certificate Upload
Utility as needed.
182
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
Overview
This section describes the solutions to possible hardware/firmware issues that could arise during the common operation
of a Modero touch panel.
Panel Doesn’t Respond To Touches
Symptom: The device either does not respond to touches on the touch screen or does not register the touch as being in
the correct area of the screen.
If the screen is off:
The device may be in Shutdown Mode. Press and hold the screen until the device turns on.
The device battery may be drained. Place the device into a Table Docking Station or a Wall Docking Station,
or connect it to its included power source to recharge the battery.
If the screen is on:
The protective laminate coating may still be on the LCD. Verify that the coating on the LCD is removed
before beginning any calibration process. The protective cover makes calibration difficult because the device
cannot calibrate on specific crosshairs when the sheet is pressing on the whole LCD.
The previous calibration may be off. Reset the device calibration, as explained in the Calibrate Page section
on page 82.
Battery Will Not Hold Or Take A Charge
Symptom: The battery will not hold or take a charge and shows no indication of charging, either on the bargraphs or in
the Battery Setup page.
To keep the battery from being damaged from operating at too low a level, the firmware places it into a protected state.
The panel must have the latest firmware. If it doesn’t, the firmware can be found at www.amx.com.
1. Load the firmware into the panel, using NetLinx Studio.
2. After loading the firmware, power cycle the MVP (this is a complete power cycle, not a Reboot). The panel will
now show the current firmware version within the Setup > Panel Information page.
3. Connect the power supply to the panel. You will see 2 warning messages on the display.
The first one warns that the battery is low and must be charged.
The second warning tells you that the battery is in a protected mode.
4. Wait a few minutes and then check the Battery Settings page on the device to see any charging activity on the bar
graphs. (For more information, refer to the Power Management Page section on page 47.)
The “Sensor” device in the Online Tree tab below the MVP panel should show v1.24 or higher after the upgrade, as
shown in FIG. 131:
FIG. 131 "Sensor" device in the Online Tree tab
MVP-9000i Isn’t Appearing In The Online Tree Tab
1. Verify that the System number is the same on both the NetLinx Project Navigator window and the System Settings
page on the device.
2. Verify the proper NetLinx Master IP and connection methods entered into the Master Connection section of the
System Settings page.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
183
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
MVP Can’t Obtain a DHCP Address
In requesting a DHCP Address, the DHCP Server can take up to a few minutes to provide the address.
1. Verify that the AP is configured to match the MVP panel Network Name (SSID) field, Encryption, Default Key, and
Current Key string.
Remember that the Passphrase generator on the panel does not produce the same
Current Key if using the same passphrase on the AP.
2. In NetLinx Studio, select Diagnostics > Network Address and verify the System number.
3. If the IP Address field is still empty, give the device a few minutes to negotiate a DHCP Address and try again.
My AP Doesn’t Seem To Be Working
WEP will not work unless the same default key is set on both the panel and the Access Point (AP).
Example: If the access point was set to default WEP key 4 (which was 01:02:03:04:05), the Modero’s Default WEP key
4 must be set to 01:02:03:04:05.
NetLinx Studio Only Detects One Of My Connected Masters
Each Master is given a Device Address of 00000.
Only one Master can be assigned to a particular System number. If you want to work with multiple Masters, open
different instances of NetLinx Studio and assign each Master its own System value.
Example: A site has an NXC-ME260/64 and an NI-4000. In order to work with both units. The ME260 can be assigned
System #1 and the NI-4000 can then be assigned System #2 using two open sessions of NetLinx Studio v 2.x.
Can’t Connect To a NetLinx Master
Symptom: I can’t seem to connect to a NetLinx Master using NetLinx Studio.
Select Settings > Master Comm Settings > Communication Settings > Settings (for TCP/IP), and uncheck the
"Automatically Ping the Master Controller to ensure availability".
The pinging is to determine if the Master is available and to reply with a connection failure instantly if it is not. Without
using the ping feature, a connection may still be attempted, but a failure will take longer to be recognized.
If you are trying to connect to a Master controller that is behind a firewall, you may
have to uncheck this option. Most firewalls will not allow ping requests to pass
through for security reasons.
When connecting to a NetLinx Master controller via TCP/IP, the program will first try to ping the controller before
attempting a connection. Pinging a device is relatively fast and will determine if the device is off-line, or if the TCP/IP
address that was entered was incorrect.
If you decide not to ping for availability and the controller is off-line, or you have an incorrect TCP/IP address, the
program will try for 30-45 seconds to establish a connection.
Only One Modero Panel In My System Shows Up
Symptom: I have more than one Modero panel connected to my System Master and only one shows up.
Multiple NetLinx Compatible devices, such as MVP panels, can be associated for use with a single Master. Each panel
comes with a defaulted Device Number value of 10001. When using multiple panels, different Device Number values
have to be assigned to each panel.
1. Press and hold the Reset button (FIG. 48) to open the Setup page.
2. Press the Protected button, enter 1988 into the on-screen Keypad’s password field, and press Done when finished.
3. Enter a Device Number value for the panel into the Device Number Keypad. The default is 10001 and the range is
from 1 - 32000.
Panel Behaves Strangely After Downloading A Panel File Or Firmware
Symptom: After downloading a panel file or firmware to a G4 device, the panel behaves strangely.
If the panel already contains a large enough file, subsequent downloads will take up more space than is available and
could often corrupt the Compact Flash. The demo file that typically ships with G4 panels is one such file.
Symptoms include:
184
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
Having to repeat the download.
Inability to make further downloads to the panel. May get "directory" errors, "graphics hierarchy" errors, etc.,
indicating problems with the Compact Flash.
Panel will not boot, or gets stuck on "AMX" splash screen.
Other problems also started after downloading to a new panel or a panel with a TPD4 file that takes up a considerable
amount of the available Compact Flash.
1. DO NOT download TPD4 files (of large size) over the demo pages, or any other large TPD4 file.
2. First download a small blank one page file to the G4 panel using the Normal Transfer option to send/download the
page.
3. Reboot the device.
4. Do your regular file or firmware download.
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
185
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
186
MVP-9000i 9" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom
Appendix C: Troubleshooting
Enter the Document Name Here
187
AMX. All rights reserved. AMX and the AMX logo are registered trademarks of AMX. AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time.
©2013
3/2013
It’s Your World - Take Control™
3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX 75082 USA • 800.222.0193 • 469.624.8000 • 469-624-7153 fax • 800.932.6993 technical support • www.amx.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising